Inglés 1P0012003BA (07.07) (GT9)
auto emoción
Leon Inglés (07.07)
auto emoción
LEON
owner’s manual
1P0012003BA
Portada Manual LEON 30/8/07 09:33 Página 3
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la
técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
❀
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.09.07
Interior Manual LEON 30/8/07 09:36 Página 1
Foreword
This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with
your vehicle.
Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the
vehicle.
leon ingles.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
leon ingles.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Contents 3
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
(ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving economically and with respect for the
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
16
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
51
55
55
55
56
59
65
72
84
84
84
88
92
93
93
99
100
102
104
106
109
112
112
118
120
120
124
127
127
128
130
131
132
135
138
139
142
142
144
147
151
152
152
153
154
155
158
159
164
165
167
171
171
171
172
173
178
178
178
179
183
leon ingles.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Contents4
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (86 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp) . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0l 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 177 kW (240 bhp). Cupra
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp) . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual .
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual .
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
186
187
187
188
190
190
191
197
199
199
199
200
200
201
201
202
203
204
207
212
214
217
218
221
221
229
229
231
237
239
246
255
258
261
261
261
263
264
264
266
266
267
268
269
270
272
273
274
275
277
278
279
280
282
283
284
285
287
289
291
leon ingles.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual
Before reading this manual it must be understood
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of going to press. Some of the equipment described here
will not be available until a later date, or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or
variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified in accord-
ance with technical or market requirements or model year; this can not be
interpreted as dishonest advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Even if the copyright symbol
does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious
dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-
ment.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
leon ingles.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Content6
Content
This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and
clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively
short sections making up chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire
manual is divided into five large parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable
climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance
Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain
problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical data
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
leon ingles.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 7
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and follow in the interest of your own
safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
• This manual contains important information concerning the driver's
and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the vehicle
wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your
own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
• Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury during an accident.
Never “gamble” with your safety and the safety of your passengers. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The
following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
• three-point seat belts,
• belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats,
• belt tension devices for the front seats,
• belt height adjustment for the front seats,
• front airbags,
• side airbags in the front seat backrests,
• side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
• curtain airbags,
• crash-active front head restraints*,
• “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the rear side seats with the
“ISOFIX” system,
• height-adjustable head restraints,
• head restraints with in-use position and non-use position,
• adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in accident situations. But
this safety equipment cannot help you or your passengers if you or your
leon ingles.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving8
passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or
use this equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to observe when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before starting every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Securely restrain all parcels ⇒ page 16.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your
size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the
head restraints in the in-use position ⇒ page 14.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly
applied seat belts ⇒ page 46.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers
also to assume a proper sitting position ⇒ page 10.
– Fasten your safety belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly ⇒ page 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected, you endanger
yourself as well as others on the road ⇒ , for this reason:
– Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,
e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
leon ingles.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 9
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres-
sure of time.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
leon ingles.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving10
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ fig. 1.
– Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
your knees still slightly angled ⇒ .
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ fig. 2.
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper
distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head
restraint position for
driver
leon ingles.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 11
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
–Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 19.
– Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat ⇒ page 127.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
• Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel ⇒ page 10, fig. 1.
If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the
risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
• Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other
manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may
sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu-
vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag
system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting
position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest
possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒ .
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 19.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 25.
For detailed information on how to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
⇒ page 130.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
leon ingles.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving12
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between
your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor-
rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event
of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden
braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is
wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to
the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the
belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
observe the following:
– Adjust the headrest to the correct position ⇒ page 14.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.
– Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 19.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle ⇒ page 46.
WARNING
• If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
• Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an
upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly.
If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 13
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ fig. 3 and ⇒ fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 127.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The
resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head
restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's
head and the head rest, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
leon ingles.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving14
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Note
The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by “falling” back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations
Rear outer seat head restraints
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 positions.
–Three positions for use ⇒ fig. 5. In these positions, the head
restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along with
the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 5 Head restraints in
correct position
leon ingles.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 15
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Centre rear head restraint
– The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position.
• Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat
rear head restraints.
• Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints ⇒ page 128.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to
occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect belt web position. As the driver, you are
responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
• Never stand in the vehicle,
• never stand on the seats,
• never kneel on the seats,
• never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
• never lean against the dash panel,
• never lie on the rear bench,
• never sit on the front edge of a seat,
• never sit sideways,
• never lean out of a window,
• never put your feet out of a window,
• never put your feet on the dash panel,
• never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
• never travel in a foot well ,
• never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
• never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries
if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position.
• Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main-
tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to
assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip
⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for occupants”.
leon ingles.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving16
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must
never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened in the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be free to move further than
normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feel
for the pedals.
WARNING
• Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
• Never place objects in the driver foot well. An object could move into the
pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒ .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
fied dealership.
WARNING
• If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of
serious injuries.
• Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
• Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor
mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk
of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
leon ingles.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving 17
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
– Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings ⇒ page 17.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can
cause serious injuries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style
accordingly, to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the
vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in ⇒ page 19.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment
which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings ⇒ in “Loading the
luggage compartment” on page 16.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of “kinetic
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Safe driving18
energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
• If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings
with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the
event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
leon ingles.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 19
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts
Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how
they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
• Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of
sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen-
gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
• Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe
injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your safety belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before
driving off.
– Protect children by using child seats of the correct height for the
age of the child.
leon ingles.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts20
The warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up
1)
if the driver or
passenger* seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addi-
tion, an acoustic signal is given for a few seconds and the screen displays the
message
1)
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened
while the ignition is switched on.
1)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 21
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy is generated.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving ⇒ fig. 6 there is a certain amount of
energy known as “kinetic energy”, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and passengers. The higher the speed and the greater
the weight, the more energy there is to be “released” in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases
by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the
entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
⇒ fig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces
are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a
frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit
a wall: the occupants are
not wearing seatbelts
Fig. 7 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seatbelts
leon ingles.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts22
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal
accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with
the steering wheel, dashboard, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
⇒ fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When deployed,
airbags provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the
driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce
the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether
an airbag is fitted for the seat.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ⇒ fig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not
wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently.
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear
passenger is thrown
forward violently, hitting
the driver wearing a seat
belt.
leon ingles.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 23
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk
of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious
accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your
passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety notes on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of
injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not
damaged.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only
if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 Driver wearing
the seat belt properly: is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
leon ingles.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts24
• Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That
applies also to your front and rear passengers – danger of injury!
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
• Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the
vehicle is in motion.
• Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
• The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
• The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
• Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
• Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
• The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other
objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
• Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter
the position of the belt webbing.
• Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors
or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci-
dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
• Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be
replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there
is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
• The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly ⇒ page 198.
Safety belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
leon ingles.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 25
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ page 24, fig. 11.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices ⇒ page 28.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe
injuries.
• Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in
group 0, 0+ or 1 ⇒ page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are
properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
leon ingles.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts26
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
• belt height adjustment for the front seats.
• front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder,
never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso
⇒ page 25, fig. 12.
• The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the
stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis ⇒ page 25,
fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web
is properly positioned ⇒ page 25.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ fig. 14.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ .
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
leon ingles.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 27
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
– Press the red button on the belt buckle ⇒ fig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out ⇒ .
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the
proper belt position at the shoulder.
Fig. 15 Removing latch
plate from buckle
Fig. 16 Location of the
belt height adjuster
leon ingles.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts28
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position ⇒ page 27, fig. 16.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt ⇒ page 25.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them during the trip.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of seat belts ⇒ page 23.
Belt tension devices
Function of the belt tension device
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices.
Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
The belt tension device can be triggered only once.
The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns, or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
• If the belt tension devices are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
• The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension devices
The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed
in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove
and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
leon ingles.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seat belts 29
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension
devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases.
The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong
circumstances.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt
tension devices or seat belts.
• The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor
cannot be repaired.
• Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the
removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work,
must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
• The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident
and must be changed it they have been activated.
leon ingles.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system30
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before you drive:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 11.
– Adjust the head restraint seat correctly ⇒ page 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 46.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you
have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could
sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain
a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not
wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the
occupant. This applies particularly to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle following an accident, for whatever reason, are not an
indication as to why the airbags were triggered.
WARNING
• Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi-
tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
• All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can
sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. You should always
transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
leon ingles.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 31
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you
transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport all
children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
⇒ page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the
age and size of each child ⇒ page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
• If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child
of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
• Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju-
ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
• An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat
and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• If, under special circumstances, it should be necessary to transport a
child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely
essential that you observe the following safety measures:
− Disable the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 44, “Deactivating
airbags*”.
− The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
− Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer
and absolutely observe the warnings ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
− Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat all the way to the rear so that the greatest possible distance to the
front passenger airbag is ensured.
− Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
− The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright
position.
Warning lamp for airbag and belt tension device system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension
device system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the
vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system32
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
• does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system
cannot properly perform its protective function.
• If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by
a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or
may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the
airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used
incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may
fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
• Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft
plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard,
and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
• It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth
or one moistened with water. Never clean the dash panel and surface of the
airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the
surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic
parts can cause substantial injuries.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
• Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag
components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should
be performed only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the
necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
leon ingles.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 33
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
• Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system34
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 17 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ fig. 18.
Airbags are identified by the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a
severe frontal collision ⇒ page 37, “Safety notes on front airbag system”.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags
can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety
⇒ page 19, “Introduction”.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 31,
• does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
Fig. 17 Driver airbag
located in steering wheel
Fig. 18 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
leon ingles.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 35
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor frontal collision,
• during a side collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Function of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
deploy in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 19. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. Once the impact has been
absorbed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see
forward.
Fig. 19 Inflated front
airbags
leon ingles.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system36
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy ⇒ fig. 20. The airbag covers remain
connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are trig-
gered
leon ingles.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 37
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the
vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint
system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain
serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 46, “Child
safety”.
• Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any
objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or
allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat
⇒ fig. 21 and the front passenger seat as well as in the rear seats. The loca-
tions are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat
occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ⇒ page 40, “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system”.
In a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
Fig. 21 Side airbag in
driver seat
leon ingles.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system38
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety ⇒ page 19, “Introduction”.
The side airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor side collision,
• during a frontal collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front and rear seats
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
• In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do
not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors,
due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
• Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
• Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
• Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been
correctly closed.
• Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
• Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author-
ised workshop.
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 39
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle ⇒ fig. 22.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Fig. 22 Illustration of
principle: inflated side
airbags on left side of
vehicle
leon ingles.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system40
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
• If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury
should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the
deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or
other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach
any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the
backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side
airbags would not be triggered.
• Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the
driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side
of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the
side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness ⇒ page 199,
“Accessories, parts replacement and modifications”.
• Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the
side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them-
selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is
particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical
consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on
the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 41
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒ fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision ⇒ page 42, “Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system”.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety
⇒ page 19, “Introduction”.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front
passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
Fig. 23 Location of left curtain airbag
leon ingles.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system42
• during a frontal collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• if the vehicle rolls,
• during a minorside collision,
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme-
diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a
collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle ⇒ fig. 24.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• For safety reasons, the head air bag must be disconnected in those
vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an
Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
Fig. 24 Deployed curtain
airbags
leon ingles.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 43
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu-
pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags
so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side
windows ⇒ page 199, “Accessories, parts replacement and modifica-
tions”.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the
coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on
the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system44
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the
frontal airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle
remain functional.
Disabling front passenger airbag
– Switch off ignition.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove
box to the position OFF ⇒ fig. 25.
– Check that the warning lamp “OFF” in the instrument panel
⇒ fig. 26 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ⇒ .
Enabling front passenger airbag
– Switch off ignition.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key-operated switch in the glove
box to the position ON ⇒ fig. 25.
Fig. 25 In the glove
compartment: key for
enabling and disabling
front passenger airbag
Fig. 26 Warning lamp for
deactivated passenger
airbag in centre console
leon ingles.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Airbag system 45
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Check that the warning lamp in the instrument panel does
⇒ page 44, fig. 26 not light up when the ignition is switched on
⇒ .
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
• You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use
a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in
exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on
the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger
airbag.
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
• Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other-
wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that
in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not
deploy at all.
• When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG
OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled,
there may be a fault in the airbag system:
− Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work-
shop.
− Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front
passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault
in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju-
ries.
− It is not certain whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
during an accident! Inform your passengers of this.
• When using the ignition key to activate / deactivate the passenger front
airbag, only the passenger front airbag will be activated / deactivated. The
side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety46
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear
seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or
the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For
safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of
the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to
children just as much as adults ⇒ page 21, “Why wear seat belts?”.
But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone
structures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by “Peke”
2)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
⇒ page 47.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
2)
Not for all countries
leon ingles.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety 47
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
⇒ page 48.
– Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is
necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger
seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 44,
“Deactivating airbags*”. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment
option, move it to the highest position.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while travelling.
• Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child!
• Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly
secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries
to themselves and other occupants.
• If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving,
they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking
manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is trav-
elling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an
accident; this could have consequences including serious injury or death.
• A suitable child seat can protect your child!
• Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
• Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat
belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident.
• Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
on any sharp edges.
• Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision
or sudden braking manoeuvres.
• The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web is
properly positioned ⇒ page 24, “Safety belts”.
• Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 48, “Child seats”.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety48
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R means: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration ⇒ fig. 27.
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 47.
Fig. 27 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat.
leon ingles.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety 49
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Child seats using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” system (or even the anti-rota-
tion system) or seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are most
appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
protected by group 2 child seats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat
belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints in
conjunction with properly worn seat belts ⇒ fig. 29.
Fig. 28 A category 1
forward-facing child seat
fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 29 Forward-facing
child seat installed on rear
seat.
leon ingles.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety50
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre
of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie
close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across
the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take
up any slack ⇒ page 24, “Safety belts”.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 47.
leon ingles.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety 51
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
• Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
• Child seats in groups 0, 0+ y 1 with the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” systems
can be secured without fastening the seatbelt by “ISOFIX” and “Toptether”
securing rings or anti-rotating systems ⇒ page 52.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt.
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX” and “Toptether”
anchors or antirotation mechanism/bracket
WARNING
• When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a
restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front
passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in
exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 44, “Deactivating
airbags*” and move the seat to its highest position, in case it has this
adjustment.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 47.
Weight class Weight
Seat locations
Front passenger Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Child safety52
Securing the child seat by “ISOFIX” and “Toptether”
systems or anti-rotating system.
The child seat with “ISOFIX” system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
– Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
– Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
equipped with “Toptether” anchor points, secure it to the corre-
spondent ring. If the child seat is fitted with any other antirota-
tion system, follow the manufacturer instructions carefully.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and in others they are secured to the rear
floor. Access to “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.
“Toptether” rings are located in the space behind the rear seats. They are
often located on the rear of the seat backs.
Child seats with “ISOFIX” and “Toptether” mountings are available from the
Authorised Service Centres.
WARNING
• The retaining rings are designed only for use with “ISOFIX” and
“Toptether” child seats.
• Never secure child seats that do not have the “ISOFIX” or “Toptether”
system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings – this can result in
potentially fatal injuries to the child!
• Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and
“Toptether” anchors.
Fig. 30 ISOFIX securing
rings
leon ingles.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
53
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
leon ingles.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
54
Fig. 31 Instrument panel
leon ingles.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 55
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Instrument panel:
− Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thumb wheel for left seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
− Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Air conditioner* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio
Thumb wheel for right seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever
Cup holder compartment
Rotary control for adjustment of the exterior rear view mirrors
Switches for
− Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake
Indicator light for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . . . .
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
A
1
A
2
112
A
3
A
4
115
A
5
115
A
6
117, 167
A
7
56
59
72
A
8
30
A
9
120, 61
A
10
131
A
11
142
144
147
A
12
A
13
131
A
14
30
A
15
132
A
16
A
17
A
18
125
A
19
93
153
80
A
20
A
21
44
A
22
A
23
154
A
24
204
A
25
106
A
26
106
A
27
106
leon ingles.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit56
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 57
Multi-function display
Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 57
Rev counter ⇒ page 58
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button ⇒ page 58
Speedometer
Fig. 32 Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
leon ingles.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 57
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone ⇒ fig. 33 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to
refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears in the instrument panel display
3)
PLEASE
REFUEL*.
Engine coolant temperature display
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads ⇒ fig. 34.
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long
as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning* text appears in the
combi-instrument display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* ⇒ page 72, fig. 46 will light up if the needle is in the
warning zone. The following warning appears in the instrument panel
3)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 33 Instrument panel:
fuel gauge
Fig. 34 Instrument panel:
engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit58
display
4)
. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level
⇒ page 212 ⇒ .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always bear in mind the safety
warnings ⇒ page 204.
Caution
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone on the dial ⇒ page 56, fig. 32 indicates the
maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm
and after it has been run in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a
gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before
the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution
The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine
noise.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display.
– Turn the setting knob ⇒ page 56, fig. 32 anti-clockwise to
the stop to set the hour. If the knob is turned briefly anti-clock-
wise the clock will advance one hour further.
– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the limit stop to set the
minutes. If the knob is turned briefly clockwise the clock will
advance one minute further.
4)
Depending on the model version
A
4
A
5
leon ingles.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 59
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Digital display in the instrument panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display ⇒ page 58.
Distance display or service interval display ⇒ page 60.
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox*.
Display for the gears in Tiptronic mode (automatic gearbox)*. The
selected gear appears in the display field with a light background
⇒ fig. 36.
Fig. 35 Detail of the
instrument cluster: screen
with different indicators
Fig. 36 Detail of the
instrument cluster: screen
with Tiptronic gear indi-
cator
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
leon ingles.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit60
Displayed categories
The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and
trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Warning and monitoring indicators: “Warning and indication lamps”
Clock: “Setting the time”. In some vehicles the ambient temperature is
displayed to the right of the clock.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
- Optional indicators: e.g. Multi-function display (MFD) and ambient
temperature display
- Automatic indicators: Information texts and warnings: “Warning and
information messages on the screen”
- Menus providing further information and which can be used to make
diverse settings are also shown: “Instrument panel menus”
Distance display or flexible service interval display: “Distance display or
flexible service interval display”
Selector lever position display for the automatic gearbox. The actual
position of the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)
are highlighted.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset
button ⇒ page 56, fig. 32 .
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due
soon. A “spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance
that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will
change after approximately 10 seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The
instrument panel displays shows the following message
5)
: SERV. IN ... KM OR
... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after
the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can
be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the
rocker switch of the MFI ⇒ page 61, fig. 38 .
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by
pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
Fig. 37 Digital display in
the instrument panel
A
1
A
1
A
2
5)
Depending on the model version
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 61
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey
and consumption data.
The multi-function system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting memory
– With the ignition switched on, briefly press the button ⇒ fig. 38
on the windscreen wiper lever to move between the two
memories.
Resetting the memory
– Select the memory that you would like to reset.
– Press and hold button on the windscreen wiper lever for at
least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the moment
the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is continued
within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be added to
Fig. 38 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever: button A and rocker
switch B
Fig. 39 Digital instru-
ment panel display:
average fuel consumption
indicator
A
A
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit62
the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically be deleted
if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time, 9999 kilometres
distance travelled and 999 litres of fuel consumed. The memory will automat-
ically be deleted if one of the named values is reached.
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 40 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Memory displays
• Journey duration
• Speed warning
• Average speed
• Distance
• Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
• Average fuel consumption
• Current fuel consumption
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Fig. 40 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever: button A and rocker
switch B
Fig. 41 Digital instru-
ment panel display:
average fuel consumption
indicator.
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 63
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen
6)
and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
Ø km/h - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.
The display will be updated every 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion.
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
Ø litre/100km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown ⇒ page 62, fig. 41 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
whilst the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
ltr/100km or ltr/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 183.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45°C to +58°C. At temperatures
lower than +4°C, an “ice crystal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
above +4°C or 6°C if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information text in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
6)
Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be
represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
A
A
A
A
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit64
cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An
audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2).
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note
In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)
7)
• Brake system symbol with warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP CHECK COOLANT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):
• Fuel symbol with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
• Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
⇒ page 214.
• Electronic immobiliser symbol with the information text SAFE. A valid
key was not used, for this reason the vehicle may not start.
7)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 65
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Instrument panel menus
Main menu
The menu enables access to the different display functions.
Open main menu
– Switch on the ignition.
– Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may
be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is
displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of rocker switch . The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines.
– Press button to select the entry.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu selection and
rocker switch B to change
the menu
Fig. 43 Digital instru-
ment panel display: Main
menu
A
B
A
B
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit66
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Main menu Function
Multi-function display Change to the multi-function display (MFD): “Multi-function display (MFD)”
Audio The current station will be shown when the radio is switched on.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. The navigation system must be
switched on. When the destination guide is activated, the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The
display is similar to that of the Navigation system.
If the destination guide is not activated, the direction of travel (compass) and the name of the street along which
you are driving are shown.
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: “Fixed tele-
phone installation”
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information texts: “Vehicle status menu”
This option flashes when one of these texts is displayed.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when using winter tyres, units, language, independent heating,
the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience menu to be reset.
Display off The display is switched off.
It comes on again on entering the main menu or when a warning, breakdown or service message appears. The
main menu will be shown in the display for approximately 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on. The display
will then switch off again.
leon ingles.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 67
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure.
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to
use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu
– Switch on the ignition.
– Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the main menu “Configuration”
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
–Select menu Configuration.
– Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
tion menu is opened.
3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”
– Select option Winter tyres using the rocker switch.
– Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
– Use the rocker switch to select the menu entry +10km/h or -10
km/h and press the button to either increase or decrease the set
speed.
Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu selection and
rocker switch B to change
the menu
Fig. 45 Digital instru-
ment panel display:
winter tyres indicator
A
B
A
A
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit68
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
– Use the rocker switch to select the menu point On/ Off and press
the button to switch the speed warning either on or off. If the
speed warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”
– In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu “Winter tyres”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
On the display
Winter tyres
Function
Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last displayed menu is shown.
leon ingles.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 69
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
– Select the option Vehicle status from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Information and warning
messages on the screen” will automatically disappear from the screen after a
time and will be stored in the “Vehicle status” menu.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there are no
messages, ok appears on the display. If there are several messages, each one
is shown for four seconds.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle functions.
Open Configuration menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”.
Configuration Function
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navigation system can be changed. Both 12- and 24-hour
formats are available and the time may be changed to summer time (an S appears in the upper part of
the screen)
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an optical and acoustic warning will be given by the
system. You can use this function, for example, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not suited for the
top speed of your vehicle. See chapter “Wheels” in owner's manual
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts can be seen in seven different languages
Units This option allows you to select the units for displaying temperature, fuel consumption values and dis-
tances.
Convenience From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle convenience settings.
leon ingles.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit70
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle convenience settings.
Open menu Convenience
– Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
– Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Lights & visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings: “Lights and visibility Menu”
Display off Only emergency messages appear
Back This returns to the main menu
A
A
A
A
Convenience Function
Open doors Selective opening/ Complete opening
Self-locking
Self-unlocking
Audible warning function On / off (acoustic signal of centralised locking)
Convenience opening Off
All
1 door
Synchronized regulation of wing mirrors Synchronized/individual
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
leon ingles.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 71
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button on the windscreen wiper lever.
– Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: “Example of menu use”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
A
A
A
A
Lights & visibility Function
Coming Home/
Leaving Home
The lighting duration may be modified, in steps of 10 seconds, from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maxi-
mum of 90 seconds
The function may also be deactivated.
Indicator conf. With the convenience mode activated, the indicator will blink at least three times when turned on.
Manufacturer's settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the functions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
leon ingles.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit72
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 46 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of
the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on
certain models/model years or are optional extras.
leon ingles.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 73
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
Fuel level / reserve ⇒ page 75
Coolant level / coolant temperature ⇒ page 75
Rear fog light switched on ⇒ page 76
Turn signals in operation ⇒ page 76
Trailer turn signals in operation ⇒ page 76
Main beam switched on ⇒ page 76
Bulb defective ⇒ page 77
Cruise control system switched on ⇒ page 77
Washer fluid level ⇒ page 77
Parking brake applied
or low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
⇒ page 77
Engine oil pressure ⇒ page 78
ABS system fault ⇒ page 78
Pollen accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter ⇒ page 79
Alternator fault ⇒ page 79
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
12
A
13
A
14
leon ingles.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit74
Fasten seat belts! ⇒ page 19
Tyre pressure ⇒ page 80
Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 81
Glow plug system for diesel engine
If lit: preheating active
If flashing: engine fault
⇒ page 81
Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag disabled ⇒ page 28
Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 81
If flashing: electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) is
working
If it remains lit: ESP malfunction or off
⇒ page 81
Automatic selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) ⇒ page 82
Electromechanical steering ⇒ page 82
Brake pad wear indicator ⇒ page 82
Door open indicator ⇒ page 82
SAFE Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 83
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
A
23
A
24
leon ingles.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 75
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your
stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk
of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings
⇒ page 204.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear in the display.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to
the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible
warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity ⇒ page 201.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
8)
: PLEASE
REFUEL!
Coolant Level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
• The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
three acoustic warning signals ⇒ are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
9)
: CHECK
COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary ⇒ page 239.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a qualified workshop.
8)
Depending on the model version
9)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit76
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
10)
: STOP CHECK
COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL ⇒ page 212.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒ .
WARNING
• If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a
safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and
place the warning triangle.
• Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings
⇒ page 204.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further
information ⇒ page 112.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper-
ation.
Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left or right indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If one turn signal fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
Further information on the turn signals ⇒ page 117.
Trailer turn signals
This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are
operated while towing a caravan or trailer.
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle.
The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information ⇒ page 117.
10)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 77
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
11)
: LEFT FULL
LIGHT FAULT.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
Further notes on the cruise control system ⇒ page 167.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 214.
The following message is shown in the instrument panel display
12)
: REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Brake system* / handbrake
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp lights up if
• If the handbrake is on
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message
will appear in the instrument panel display
13)
: HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an
audible warning is given.
• If the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 217.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
13)
: STOP BRAKE
FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• If there is a fault in the brake system.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
13)
: BRAKE
SYSTEM FAULT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system
warning lamp.
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 204, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level ⇒ page 217, “Brake fluid” in the reservoir is
too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
nical assistance.
11)
Depending on the model version
12)
Depending on the model version
13)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit78
• If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified
workshop and have the fault corrected.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil ⇒ page 207.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
14)
: STOP
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the ⇒ page 171.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 204.
• If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 217, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has
dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop
and have the fault corrected.
14)
Depending on the model version
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 79
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL ⇒ page 174.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see ⇒ page 171.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter*
If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the
appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S
gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately
2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.
If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to repair the fault ⇒ page 179.
WARNING
• Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and
traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal maneouvers
in surrounding traffic.
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
If the indicator flashes the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle
operation.
leon ingles.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit80
Tyre pressure*
The tyre monitor
15)
compares wheel revolutions and with this information,
the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel
changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights . The wheel diameter changes
when:
• Tyre pressure is insufficient.
• The tyre structure is damaged.
• The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
• The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with
a trailer or on extreme slopes).
• The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
• The emergency wheel is fitted.
• The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels,
the button ⇒ fig. 47 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on until an
acoustic signal is heard.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights
If the tyre pressure of one wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver
then the indicator lights ⇒ .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
specialist workshop.
WARNING
• When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and
avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check
the tyre pressure and status.
• The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre
pressure must be regularly checked.
• Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in
winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or
function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights after turning the
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief trip.
15)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 47 Central console:
tyre monitor system
button
leon ingles.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 81
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised
Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Glow plug system / Engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
16)
: EXHAUST
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following information text displayed in the instrument panel display :
EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation
programme.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and TCS.
The warning lamp has the following functions:
• It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a
test of the function is carried out.
• It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
16)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit82
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear
in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no
assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you
will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the
steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
Brake pad wear indicator*
As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis-
able to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
17)
: CHECK
BRAKE PADS.
WARNING
Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the
warning display lights up.
Indicator for open doors or tailgate
This indicator lights if one of the doors or the tailgate is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off
about 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
17)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cockpit 83
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
lock.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message
18)
: SAFE. The
vehicle cannot be used in that case ⇒ page 155.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
18)
Depending on the model version
leon ingles.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls84
Steering wheel controls
General points
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-
matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
• Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
• Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
mp3, CD Changer) and the radio / navigation System, in which case they also
control the Navigation system.
• Version for automatic gearbox* ⇒ page 163.
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 48 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 49 Controls on the
steering wheel
leon ingles.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls 85
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
a)
Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
CDC Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function
Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function
Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back)
No specified function
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
leon ingles.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls86
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 50 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 51 Controls on the
steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD Audio
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Volume up Continue volume up
Volume down Continue volume down
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Change folder
(forward)
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Change folder
(Back)
Rewind
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
leon ingles.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM...
No specified function
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quite telephone menu
No specified function
a)
Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
leon ingles.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls88
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 52 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 53 Controls on the
steering wheel
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
A
A
A
B
A
C
leon ingles.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction
Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Silence Pause No specified function
Next preset No function
Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward)
No specified function
Previous preset No function
Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back)
No specified function
a)
Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format.
b)
Button E, rapid flashing: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
leon ingles.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls90
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 54 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 55 Steering wheel
Audio + Telephone
controls
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC Radio CD
CD mp3
a)
CDC
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volume and the navigation message continuously
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast forward
Change folder
(forward)
Fast forward
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rewind
Change folder
(Back)
Rewind
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
leon ingles.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat the last Navigation instruction
Only if the Navigation function is activated.
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak
No specified function
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
No specified function
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quite telephone menu
No specified function
a)
Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format.
b)
Button E, rapid flashing: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
leon ingles.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Steering wheel controls92
Steering wheel lighting controls
The lighting is turned on using the simultaneous pressing of the following
keys:
Fig. 56 Steering wheel
Audio + Telephone
version controls
Fig. 57 Steering wheel
audio version controls
Push simultaneously...
Audio ⇒ fig. 57
Audio + Telephone
⇒ fig. 56
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be activated using any of the following options:
• the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manu-
ally,
• the central locking button, (electronic control) in the passenger compart-
ment ⇒ page 97,
• the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
⇒ page 100.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security:
- Locking system “Safe”
- Auto-locking to prevent involuntary unlocking
- Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system
- Emergency unlocking system.
Note
For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system “Safe”
This is an anti-theft device consisting of a double lock for the
door locks and a deactivation function for the boot in order to
make forced entry more difficult.
Activation
The “safe” system is activated when the vehicle is locked using the key or the
remote control.
To activate this system with the key, rotate the key once in the door lock
cylinder in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the
remote once.
When this system is activated, it is not possible to open the doors normally,
from the outside or the inside. The boot/tailgate may not be opened. The
central locking button does not work.
Voluntary deactivation
The “Safe” system can be deactivated voluntarily by the user.
This is done by locking two times in quick succession (in under 2 seconds).
This double locking can be executed using the key or the remote control.
Using the key, rotate the lock cylinder twice in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on the
remote twice.
When the “Safe” system is deactivated, the alarm volumetric sensor is also
deactivated.
leon ingles.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking94
When the “Safe” system is deactivated, the doors are locked using the simple
locking system, meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not
from the exterior.
Involuntary deactivation
The methods described for deactivation of the “Safe” system may be
executed involuntarily (for example, if we press the button because we
want to lock the vehicle, and it locks as a result, however, we are not sure that
it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds, we will have
deactivated the “Safe” system).
Deactivation when opening
To deactivate the system on opening, see “Selective unlocking system*”
“Safe” status
On the front left hand side door, there is a light indicator visible from the
outside of the vehicle that indicates the “Safe” system status.
We can see that the “Safe” system is activated, by the flashing of the light
indicator. The indicator will flash on all vehicles, whether they are fitted with
an alarm or not, and until the vehicle is unlocked.
We can see that the “Safe” system is deactivated, when the light indicator
flashes about seven times and turns off. If the vehicle is not fitted with an
alarm then it remains off. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, once 28
seconds have passed since the indicator is switched off, it will start to flash
again and continue until the vehicle is unlocked once more.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without alarm: Indicator continually flashing.
Safe deactivated without alarm: Indicator flashes about seven times and
turns off.
Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator flashes about seven times, turns
off and then continues to flash after about 28 seconds.
WARNING
No one should remain in the vehicle if the “Safe” deadlock mechanism has
been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside or the
outside and this would make any outside intervention difficult in case of
emergency. Danger of death. People could become trapped inside in an
emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows for unlocking only the driver's door, or all
the vehicle.
Driver's door unlock button
This is done by a simple unlocking (once). This can be done with the key or
the remote control.
With the key, rotate the key once in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction.
The driver's door will be released from the “Safe” system and unlocked and
may be opened. Once the door is opened, 15 seconds remain for turning on
the ignition, in which moment, the “Safe” system will be deactivated on the
remaining doors and the light indicator will be turned off. For vehicles fitted
with an alarm, this system is deactivated.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The
“Safe” system is deactivated for all the vehicle, only the driver's door is
unlocked for opening, the alarm is turned off as is the light indicator.
Unlocking all doors and the boot
So that all the doors and the boot can be opened, the unlock button on
the remote must be pressed twice.
The button must be pressed twice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate
the “Safe” system for all the vehicle, all doors will be unlocked and the boot
leon ingles.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
will be activated. The indicator will be turned off as will be the alarm for those
vehicles fitted with one.
Unlocking the boot
See ⇒ page 100 and ⇒ page 104.
Locking system for involuntary unlocking
This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where
the vehicle is opened unintentionally
The vehicle will be re-locked automatically, if it is unlocked and neither the
boot or any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from
the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be
locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door may be unlocked and opened from the interior (for example when
a passenger gets out). For this, simply operate the lever on the inside of the
door.
WARNING
The door handles should never be operated when the vehicle is running:
the door will open.
Emergency unlocking system
The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident,
except for the boot. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside using the
central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see “Manually locking the
doors”.
leon ingles.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking96
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap ⇒ fig. 58 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side doors
and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no
longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door
handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver's door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
the internal door handle for the required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
vated on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the
door is unlocked but does not open. The exterior door handle may now be
used to open the door.
Note
Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
repeat the previous instructions.
Fig. 58 Locking the doors
manually
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Central locking button
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using
the central locking button.
Locking the vehicle
– Press the button ⇒ .
Unlocking the doors
– Press the button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except, if the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your
vehicle:
• It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside
(this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
• The driver or front passenger door cannot be locked if it is open. This
prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle.
• Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central
locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button may be
used once more.
• There is a danger that the key may remain inside the vehicle, if the vehicle
is locked using the central locking button when the driver's door is closed
and, for example, the passenger door open. If this door is closed, then the
keys will remain inside the vehicle.
• All doors may be locked separately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
the door release lever once.
WARNING
• If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside.
• The central locking button is not operative in the following cases.
• When the vehicle is locked from the outside (using the remote or the
key).
• While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
with the key.
Note
• Vehicle locked, button amber colour.
• Vehicle unlocked, button red.
Fig. 59 Detail of the
centre console: central
locking system button
leon ingles.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking98
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened
from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a
door accidentally while the vehicle is moving.
This function is independent of the electronic opening and locking
systems of the vehicle. It only affects the rear doors. It is only
possible to activate it and deactivate it manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door you wish to childproof.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the right hand side doors ⇒ fig. 60, ⇒ fig. 61.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door for which you wish to deacti-
vate the childproof lock.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key clockwise for the right hand side doors and anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ⇒ fig. 60, ⇒ fig. 61.
When the childproof lock is activated, the door can be opened from the
outside only. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated using the
key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Fig. 60 Child safety lock
on the left hand side door
Fig. 61 Child safety lock
on the right hand side
door
leon ingles.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
• one remote control key ⇒ fig. 62 with folding key bit,
• one key without remote control ,
• one key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab ⇒ fig. 62
. Therefore:
• Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
• Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.
If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that
electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in
people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
• Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of
your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key
with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk
of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
Caution
There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the
keys from moisture and excessive vibration.
Fig. 62 Set of keys
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking100
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle from a distance.
Using the button ⇒ fig. 63 (arrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 63 . The doors and the tailgate are
unlocked.
Locking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 63 .
Unlocking the tailgate. Press the button ⇒ fig. 63 until all indicators
on the vehicle briefly flash. When the unlocking button is pressed, 2
minutes remain for opening the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on the key ⇒ fig. 63, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range of the remote
control depends on various conditions. The range is reduced when the
batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button is pressed once the driver's door is unlocked, all
others remain locked.
Fig. 63 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 64 Range of the
remote control
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
1
leon ingles.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Press the button twice to unlock all doors.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. This could result in
serious injuries, accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key
with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that
electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in
people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Note
• The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only
the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the
radio frequency remote control key is pressed. When the button is pressed
once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
• The remote control functions only when you are in range ⇒ page 100,
fig. 64 (red area).
• If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, the vehicle will be
locked again automatically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened
within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle. This function prevents the vehicle
from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
• If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised ⇒ page 101.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the
battery must be replaced.
Caution
Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations
governing the protection of the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
Synchronising the remote control key
– Use both keys that have been delivered with the vehicle
⇒ page 99, fig. 62, the key fitted with the remote control and
the normal key .
– Unlock the vehicle from the driver side door using the key
without the remote.
– Turn the ignition ON using the key without the remote control.
– Lock the vehicle using the driver side door lock with the remote
control key ⇒ page 100, fig. 63.
– In a time of maximum 30 seconds the following operations must
be carried out:
A
1
A
1
A
A
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking102
– Operate the button once for locking on the remote control, the
indicators will flash.
– Operate the button once for unlocking on the remote control
for more than 2 seconds.
– The key will have been programmed and the vehicle will unlock,
confirming at the same time the synchronisation.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres, they
must be matched to the locking system.
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised move-
ments are detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the
mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is
locked. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
• Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
• Opening a door
• Opening the bonnet
• Opening the tailgate
• Switching on the ignition
• Movements in the vehicle
• Undue manipulation of the alarm
• Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
car. This is done as follows:
• Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
• Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
• Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within 15
seconds, the alarm is triggered.
How is the alarm switched off?
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control
or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
leon ingles.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
• If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone
(e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal
is triggered again.
• Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
• The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm*, that detects unauthorized vehicle entry using ultra-
sound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Activation
– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
– Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
• The “safe” security system remains deactivated if the volumetric
sensor is deactivated.
• For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the
passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter-
ference with the sensor.
Note
• If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
leon ingles.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking104
Tailgate
Opening and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
– Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate ⇒ fig. 65. The tail-
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
– Grip the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, using a light movement.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the boot may be opened.
To the locking / unlocking status, press the button or the button on
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
erly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the tailgate is opened while
the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 65 Boot lid: opening
from the outside
Fig. 66 Detail of the
inside of the tailgate:
hand grip
A
1
leon ingles.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are
lit. This may damage the lighting units.
• Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the
window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect-
edly while driving.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even
have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the tailgate.
• Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gasses may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
• If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
may not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example if the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the boot allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment
– Insert the key bit in the groove and unlock the locking system,
turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow
⇒ fig. 67.
Fig. 67 Boot lid: emer-
gency open
leon ingles.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking106
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated using the
controls in the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
– Press the button to open a window.
– Pull button to close a window ⇒ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒ .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons in the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch *
Safety switch in the driver door can be used to disable the electric window
buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an
emergency.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Fig. 68 Detail of driver
door: controls for the front
and rear windows
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
3
leon ingles.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows.
Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 107. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position.
The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the button for the window briefly to the second posi-
tion. The window opens fully.
Reset the automatic closing function for the front side windows and
the automatic opening for all windows
– Close all windows.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons ⇒ page 106, fig. 68 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open or close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
• If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately ⇒ .
• If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
normal automatic function resumes.
• If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.
• If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within five seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING (continued)
A
1
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking108
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left
unsupervised in the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
• Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle
from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
⇒ page 108.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
– Once the windows are completely closed, the indicators will
flash.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
All windows which function electrically will be either opened or
closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– Once the windows are completely closed, the indicators will
flash.
leon ingles.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary button when the ignition is switched on.
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position ⇒ page 109, fig. 69 ⇒ .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
– To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended ⇒ .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunshade
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring
it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the
remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle
in an emergency.
• The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front
doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Fig. 69 Roof lining
description: rotary sun
roof control
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
leon ingles.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking110
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
Fig. 70 Roof lining
description: rotary sun
roof control
Fig. 71 Emergency
closing handle
leon ingles.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Unlocking and locking 111
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not
prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it
can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position
⇒ fig. 70 until the sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. Please note that the
sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
Operation in the event of a breakdown
In the event of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.
• Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
• Remove the lever from the cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof.
• Fit the lever back into position.
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility112
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 72 to position
.
Switching on dipped headlights
– Turn the light switch to position
.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog lights*
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the first stop. The
symbol
in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the second stop
⇒ . A warning lamp lights up in the control panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
to the last stop. A warning lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are
not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
• If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch
off the lights.
Fig. 72 Detailed view of
dash panel lights, fog
light and rear fog light
control
leon ingles.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 113
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• If the coming home* feature is activated, the acoustic signal for the
dipped beam headlights will not sound, it will sound if the position lights are
activated.
• The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
• If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
– Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
– Turn the light switch to 0.
When the switch is in this position, as soon as visibility conditions are
reduced, the lights are automatically activated. The indication “Auto”,
changes to red.
Automatic lighting
If the automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped headlights are auto-
matically switched on by a light-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
The rain function switches on the headlights if the continuous wipe function
is switched on for longer than 5 seconds. The dipped beam headlights are
switched off if the continuous wipe or the intermittent wipe functions are
switched off for longer than 255 seconds.
WARNING
• If automatic headlight control is switched on, the headlights will not be
switched on in fog or heavy rain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
switched on manually.
Note
• For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the acoustic signal will only sound if the light
control is in the position or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
home function.
• If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Fig. 73 Automatic
lighting
leon ingles.book Seite 113 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility114
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
Coming home / leaving home function*
After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the
coming home / leaving home function.
Coming home function*
To activate the function
– Put the light switch into the position
or in the “Auto” position
for those vehicles fitted with the automatic lighting function.
– Remove key from ignition switch.
To deactivate the function
– Turn light switch to position 0.
When the system is activated and it is dark the dipped headlights, rear lights
and number plate lights come on for 40 seconds, after the vehicle has been
closed.
While one of the doors or the tailgate are open, the dipped headlights, the
rear lights and the registration plate lighting remain on for about 90 seconds.
If, before this time is up, all of the doors and the tailgate are closed, another
40 seconds of lighting is given. However, if all of the doors and the tailgate
are closed after the 90 seconds have passed, the system will be deactivated
and the lights will not come on.
If you wish to reactivate the system, you must start from the beginning.
The lighting time is defined at the time of manufacture.
Leaving home function*
The function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control. In the dark, the leaving home function will light the dipped beam
lights, the rear lights and the registration plate lighting for about 40 seconds.
With the lights switch in the position “0”, the leaving home function is not
activated.
Note
• If the vehicle is used often during the night for short trips using the
coming home function, this will place a heavy demand on the battery. To
avoid this, make longer journeys whenever possible.
• Observe all relevant statutory requirements when using the lighting
systems described here.
• For those vehicles fitted with the “Dot Matrix” display, the time for the
Coming home function (about 40 seconds) can be adjusted using the
“Configuration, lights and visibility” menu.
leon ingles.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 115
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 74 .
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an
automatic headlight range system.
Headlight range control
Using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight
range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, the driver has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the
correct headlight settings.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with
dynamic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be
adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when
pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for.
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps do not have headlight range control.
Self directional headlights*
When driving around bends the headlights will light the most
important areas of the road.
This cornering light gives better illumination of the side of the road when
driving through a corner. The dynamic lighting is controlled automatically
according to speed and the steering wheel angle.
The two main headlights move at different angles to avoid that the front of the
vehicle is left completely in the dark.
Fig. 74 Instrument panel:
regulation for instrument
and switch illumination
and headlight range
control
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
2
Fig. 75 Cornering
lighting using directional
headlights
leon ingles.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility116
Note
The system operates from a speed of about 10 km/h.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights ⇒ .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
• reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
• there is an emergency
• your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect
• you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the
indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Turning on the emergency indicators
The emergency indicators turn on automatically when braking sharply at a
speed of over 60km/h, or if the ABS works for a prolonged period, in order to
alert the vehicles behind. If you accelerate, or continue at over 40km/h, the
emergency indicators turn off automatically.
WARNING
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention
of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Fig. 76 Instrument panel:
switch for hazard warning
lights
leon ingles.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
• The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
• The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Indicator and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up ⇒ fig. 77 to indicate right, and
all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
– Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release the lever. The turn signal will flash
several times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
– Turn the light switch to position
.
– Press the lever forward ⇒ fig. 77 to switch on the main
beams.
– Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand
parking lights respectively.
Fig. 77 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
leon ingles.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility118
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. The
warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb
is defective, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn
signal bulbs are damaged, warning lamp does not light up. You should
have the bulb replaced.
• The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-
instrument.
• The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the
combi-instrument.
• When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light
The switch ⇒ fig. 78 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The
interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition
is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the position O ⇒ fig. 78.
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim:
front interior lights
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the button to switch on the reading light.
Switching off the reading lights
Press the button to switch off the reading light.
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch ⇒ fig. 80 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position ⇒ fig. 80 , the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched
on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock The
light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim:
front lights
A
B
A
B
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim:
rear interior lights and
reading lights.
A
C
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
3
leon ingles.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility120
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their
mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors ⇒ fig. 81
The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
a light* in the roof turns on.
The lamp* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note
The roof lamp* will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the
ignition key. This prevents the battery discharging.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
A
5
Fig. 81 Sun visor on the
driver side
A
1
A
2
Fig. 82 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever
leon ingles.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 121
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ page 120, fig. 82 has the following
positions:
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
– Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:
short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Brief wipe
– Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief
wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the lever
pressed down for longer than 2 seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash
function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a
slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the
same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately
four seconds.
Optional heated windscreen in the wiper blade* area (page
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
icing in the zone.
This function is activated by turning the exterior heated rearview mirror*
control forwards ⇒ page 126.
WARNING
• Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
• In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system.
The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
your view of the road.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 215.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
• In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
• When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to the 0 position, they move to the rest position.
A
0
A
1
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
leon ingles.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility122
• The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
⇒ page 120, fig. 82 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again
• The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated while the vehicle is in
transit (automatic function). If you activate the wipers less than three
seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the
last wipe. To reactivate the “automatic” function the ignition must be turned
off and on again.
• When the “intermittent wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly
proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
the intervals.
• The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
• Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the
windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
• The heat output of the heated jets* is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
A
2
A
3
Fig. 83 Rain sensor*
Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper
lever
leon ingles.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 123
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Switching on the rain sensor
– Move the windscreen wiper lever into position ⇒ page 122,
fig. 84.
– Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Control to the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
the wiper intermittent function off and back on.
Note
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause sensor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position ⇒ fig. 85. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
A
1
A
A
Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever: rear window wiper
A
6
A
6
leon ingles.book Seite 123 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility124
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
– Press the lever fully forwards to position ⇒ page 123, fig. 85.
The wash function will start immediately and the wiper will start
with a slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as
long as you hold the lever in this position.
– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4
seconds, and then in intervals again.
– Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wipers func-
tion.
WARNING
• A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 215, “Changing
the front windscreen wiper blades”.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade
and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the tailgate is closed.
• In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
screen wiper will make one wipe.
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
• To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
• To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
A
7
leon ingles.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility 125
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle function
– Press button ⇒ fig. 86. Warning lamp goes out:
Switching on anti-dazzle function
– Press button ⇒ fig. 86. Warning lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it receives (for example from the
headlights of a vehicle behind). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
reverse gear is engaged.
Note
• The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
• If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ⇒ fig. 87 to position L (left exterior mirror).
Fig. 86 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror.
A
A
A
B
A
A
Fig. 87 Exterior mirror
control
leon ingles.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Lights and visibility126
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the car ⇒ .
Heating the exterior mirrors*
– Turn the knob forwards to the central position ⇒ page 125,
fig. 87 so that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the
heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated
⇒ page 121.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
– Turn the control ⇒ page 125, fig. 87 to position
to fold in the
exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if
you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help
prevent damage.
Folding rear view mirrors with convenience control*
– The outer rear view mirror will fold back automatically with
convenience closing (with the remote or the key).
– To unfold it again, open the door and use the contact.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back
out ⇒ .
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
• The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision
however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when
changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
• If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles
behind you.
• Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.
Note
• If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
• In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
• The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
A
1
leon ingles.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 127
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit
the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat position
is very important for:
• fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
• relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
• safe driving ⇒ page 7,
• and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum
protection ⇒ page 19.
WARNING
• If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body
size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and
your passengers with optimum protection.
• Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This also
applies to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident.
If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incor-
rect sitting position.
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect
the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or
between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great
as possible.
• Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents.
• Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front
passenger seat. When installing a child seat, observe the warning note in
the ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage128
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, as a very minimum at eye level
⇒ fig. 88 and ⇒ fig. 89.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 129.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Fig. 88 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 89 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
leon ingles.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 129
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions ⇒ page 14.
Angle adjustment (front seats)
– Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 90 (arrow).
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest.
– Push head restraint down.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ⇒ page 14 and
⇒ page 13.
WARNING
• Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
• Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is
a risk of serious injury.
• After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for
height to achieve optimal protection.
• Please observe the safety warnings ⇒ page 128, “Correct adjustment
of head restraints”.
Fig. 90 Adjusting and
removing the head
restraints
leon ingles.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage130
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in ⇒ fig. 91 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
– Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support*
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to
adjust the lumbar support.
The backrest curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings
made in the lumbar region. This supports the natural curvature of the spine
very effectively.
WARNING
• Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest
tilted far to the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be
achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver
and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further
the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to
improper positioning of the belt web!
• Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
care and attention.
Fig. 91 Front left seat
controls
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
leon ingles.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 131
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 92 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Rear seat bench
Fold down the seat back
– Pull the release button on the backrest (sectioned backrest)
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
– Fold down the backrest. The rear head restraints may have to be
removed before folding the seat forwards if the front seats have
been moved far back ⇒ page 129.
Fig. 92 Thumb wheel for
the front seat heating
Fig. 93 Folding the seat
backrests down
leon ingles.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage132
Folding up the seat back
– Fold the backrest back and push the backrest firmly into the lock.
The red marking should no longer be visible ⇒ fig. 94.
WARNING
• Please be careful when raising the backrest! Injuries can be caused if
the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ fig. 95.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in
motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or
in the event of an accident.
The centre console with drinks holder
The centre console has a drinks holder.
Fig. 94 Folding up the
rear seat back
Fig. 95 Passenger side:
stowage compartment
leon ingles.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 133
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Stowage compartment under the left hand side front seat*
There is a stowage locker with a cover under the front left
hand side seat.
The locker* ⇒ fig. 96 is opened by pulling on the cover.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
• The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
• Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for
passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
Folding table*
Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
– To open the table, open it up in the direction of the arrow
⇒ fig. 97.
WARNING
• The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in
motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on
injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be
closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
• Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
Fig. 96 Stowage area
under the front seats
A
A
Fig. 97 Folding table of
front left seat
leon ingles.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage134
Caution
When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Stowage compartment with the CD charger*
The CD* loader is located under the front left hand seat
To access the loader
– Open the external cover by operating the button on this cover.
– Pull the sliding internal cover to the right.
– Press the “EJECT” button.
– To close the compartment, reverse the procedure.
WARNING
• Do not close the external cover with the loader cover open.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be found:
• in the centre console,
• in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
The hooks for hanging are found on the pillar between the front and rear side
windows.
WARNING
• Do not store loose objects on the dashboard. These objects could be
flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g.
while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
accident.
• Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stowage
areas into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
accelerator. Risk of accident.
• Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe-
cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the
vehicle occupants.
leon ingles.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 135
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Front drinks holders
On the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
⇒ fig. 98.
WARNING
• Never place hot drinks in the bottle holder. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
• Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open the ashtray, lift the cover ⇒ fig. 99.
– To close, lower the cover.
Emptying the ashtray
– Extract the ashtray and empty.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray.
Fig. 98 Front drinks
holder
Fig. 99 Ashtray located
in the front drinks holder
leon ingles.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage136
Cigarette lighter*
– Press on the cigarette lighter ⇒ fig. 100 to activate it ⇒ .
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
WARNING
• Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
a fire.
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence
when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
• The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt socket in the front
centre console ⇒ fig. 101of the passenger compartment and that of the
boot* The appliances connected to each socket must not exceed a power
rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The current sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when
the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the
sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire.
To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Fig. 100 The cigarette
lighter is located in the
electric socket on the
front of the centre console
Fig. 101 Socket, centre
console, front
leon ingles.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 137
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
• Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the
battery.
• Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions on
⇒ page 199.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)
– Lift the AUX. cover ⇒ fig. 102.
– Insert the pin fully (see the radio manual).
Apple* iPod connector
®
The iPod
®
connector is located under the passenger seat.
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
Fig. 102 Auxiliary audio
connection
Fig. 103 iPod connection
under passenger seat
leon ingles.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage138
USB* Connection
Under the passenger seat there is a USB port.
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher
Warning triangle
The emergency warning triangle can be fitted in the side lining of the boot.
Note
• The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first-aid kit* can be housed in a stowage box in the left side lining of the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 104 USB connec-
tion* under passenger
seat
Fig. 105 Housing for the
emergency warning
triangle in the boot
leon ingles.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 139
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by
velcro.
Note
• The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's
standard equipment.
• The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
• Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should
purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
first-aid kit has expired.
• The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
• Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
• Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions on ⇒ page 199.
Luggage compartment
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
injuries.
• Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the
passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
• Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit-
able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
• When you transport heavy objects, always keep in mind that a change
in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
• Please observe information on safe driving ⇒ page 7, “Safe driving”.
Caution
Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
leon ingles.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage140
Luggage compartment cover
Removing the cover
– Disengage the loops ⇒ fig. 106 from the retaining pins .
– Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull
outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the luggage compartment cover, this
will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
Caution
• Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is
correctly fitted.
• An overloaded boot could mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly
seated and it may be bent or damaged.
• If the boot is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
• Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment
cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
• For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
• It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may lead to paintwork damage
or marks on the bodywork.
• Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
• Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly over
the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof
(including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on “Technical Data”.
• When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
Fig. 106 Luggage
compartment cover
A
B
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Seats and stowage 141
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
• For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
leon ingles.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning142
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating and ventilation
Controls and equipment
– Using the controls ⇒ fig. 107 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Rear window heating
This function will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes
after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing
the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic ⇒ .
Fig. 107 On the dash panel: Heater controls
A
1
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
leon ingles.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 143
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen. Air recirculation is, for safety
reasons, not possible in this position.
– Air distribution to the upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
• For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa-
tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself
with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including
the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
• In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. The
windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, you
should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer
periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 151.
A
4
A
5
leon ingles.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning144
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
– Using the controls ⇒ fig. 108 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector ⇒ page 145
Button – Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
⇒ page 145
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Button – Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 146
Air distribution control ⇒ page 145
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Fig. 108 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
A
5
A
6
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2 AC
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
leon ingles.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 145
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 151.
Heating and cooling the interior
Heating of the vehicle interior
– Turn the temperature selector ⇒ fig. 109 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the foot rest) and (towards the windscreen and
foot rest areas).
Cooling the passenger compartment
– Switch on the air conditioning using the button ⇒ page 144,
fig. 108 .
– Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired
cooling output is reached.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Fig. 109 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
AC
leon ingles.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning146
– Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine may not be running.
• The blower is switched off.
• The ambient air temperature is lower than +3°C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle.
Fig. 110 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
leon ingles.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 147
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 146, fig. 110 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the cold air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air
distribution is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the
air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over.
Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
Fig. 111 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
leon ingles.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning148
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running
and the blower is switched on.
– Press the temperature control buttons ⇒ page 147, fig. 111
or in order to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or
the right hand side respectively.
– The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated in the
display. Also, the de-icing and rear heated window functions will
turn on along with their corresponding yellow symbol. Press the
button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior.
Display of the selected interior temperature for the left side.
Button – Manual air recirculation mode.
Button – Central air distribution
Button – Downward air distribution
Button – Upward air distribution
Display of the selected interior temperature for the right side.
Button – defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function
is switched on. At temperatures over 3°C, the air conditioning system will
be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by
one level in order to dry the air. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Temperature selector for the left side ⇒ page 148
Blower control ⇒ page 149
Button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off ⇒ page 149
Button – Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control ⇒ page 148
Button – Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
system off
Temperature selector for the right side ⇒ page 148
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 151.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
– Press the button ⇒ page 147, fig. 111. “AUTO” is shown
on the display.
A
9
A
14
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11 OFF
A
12 AUTO
A
13 ECON
A
14
AUTO
leon ingles.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 149
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press the temperature selectors to set the desired temperatures
for the left and right sides of the interior. We recommend 22°C
(72°F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of
+22°C (72°F) is set in automatic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit
individual preferences or particular circumstances. It is possible to select
interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29.5°C (86°F). These are approx-
imate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or
lower depending on the ambient conditions.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature level fully automatically. The
temperature of the air supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air
distribution are regulated automatically. The system also allows for the effect
of strong sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment. Therefore,
automatic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtu-
ally all conditions throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for the air distribution, air flow or . The temperature will
continue to be regulated within the parameters manually selected by the
user.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
– To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons ⇒ fig. 112 to
, or press the air flow control . The symbol will
disappear from the display.
ECON
Fig. 112 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A
3
A
5 ECON
A
10 AUTO
leon ingles.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning150
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. It
is possible to select interior temperatures from +16°C (61°F) to +29.5°C
(86°F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 16°C (61°F) is selected, the display switches to LO. In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29.5°C (86°F) is selected the display switches to HI. In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
vehicle. Pushing the button to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning system on and off
Pressing the button switches off the air conditioning system to save
fuel. The temperature continues to be regulated. The set temperature can
then only be reached if it is higher than the ambient temperature.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from entering the vehicle.
– Press the button ⇒ page 149, fig. 112 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display
.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
For reasons of safety, air recirculation is not possible when the control for air
distribution is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the
air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over.
Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
A
10
ECON
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
General notes
The pollen filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the ambient air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high
levels of air pollution, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
Caution
• If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch off the air
conditioning with button to prevent further damage and have it
checked by a qualified workshop.
• Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-
fied workshop should problems occur.
Note
• If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect
a leak.
• Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the
windows misting over.
• The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is
extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Do not cover these slots with
articles of clothing or other objects.
• The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows
and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the sun has heated up the
vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for
a short period.
• Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
• It is advisable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to
lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to
check the system.
ECON
leon ingles.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving152
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ fig. 113 down
⇒ .
– Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is
set ⇒ fig. 114.
– Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒ .
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor-
rect seating position can result in serious injury.
• To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when
the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident.
Fig. 113 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 114 Proper sitting
position for driver
leon ingles.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 153
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at
least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone ⇒ page 152,
fig. 114. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The
Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica-
tions are necessary.
• If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the
driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make
sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the
steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in
the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases,
you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential
lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works in
conjunction with the ABS. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
In specific circumstances where you require less traction, you can switch off
the ESP by pressing button ⇒ fig. 115 .
For example:
• When driving with snow chains,
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 115 Detail of the
centre console: ESP
button
leon ingles.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving154
• when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. That is to say,
these systems are not available while ESP is not activated.
When does the button light up or flash?
• It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after
about 2 seconds.
• It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable
driving condition.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
• The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of
physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet
roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
• Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in ⇒ page 171,
“Intelligent technology”.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In the position ⇒ fig. 116 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the
steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the
vehicle ⇒ .
Switching on the ignition or glow plug system
Turn the ignition key to this position and let go of the key. If the key cannot be
turned or is difficult to turn from position to position , move the
steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key
turns freely.
Fig. 116 Ignition key
positions
A
0
A
1
A
0
A
12
leon ingles.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 155
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to
the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
• Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition
key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk
of accident!
• Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle,
even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially
important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they
could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as
the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
• Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started
or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can
result in serious injury.
Caution
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct
code.
Note
The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then
only have to turn the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 154 to start the engine.
A
2
A
0
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving156
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to press the accelerator briefly.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about
10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not
start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 239, “Fuses”.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions ⇒ page 255, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal fully and hold it in this position, the starter will then
only have to turn the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 154, fig. 116 . The
indication lamp
will light for engine pre-heating.
– When the warning lamp goes out, turn the key to position to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see ⇒ page 255.
A
1
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 157
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary load on the battery, do not use any other major elec-
trical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp ⇒ page 81 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions ⇒ page 255, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
– Stopping the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 154, fig. 116 .
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possible that it will turn
itself on once more if the temperature of the coolant increases due to the
elimination of built up heat in the engine compartment or if this is heated due
to prolonged exposure to the heat of the sun.
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake servo works only when the engine is running. You will need
more strength to brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. As you
cannot brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and
serious injury.
• The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed
from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
A
0
leon ingles.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving158
Caution
If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch right down.
– Place the gear lever into neutral gate and push the lever all the
way down.
– Slide the gearstick to the left, and then into the reverse position
shown on the gearstick.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running, before engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with
the clutch pressed in fully in order to protect the gearbox.
The reversing lights come on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
tion is on.
Fig. 117 Detail of the
centre console: gear shift
pattern of a 5-speed
manual gearbox
Fig. 118 Detail of the
centre console: gear shift
pattern of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
leon ingles.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 159
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a
gear is engaged and the clutch released.
• Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
• When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
• Do not hold the car “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature wear
and damage to the clutch.
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Fig. 119 Central console:
selector lever for auto-
matic gearbox / direct
shift gearbox DSG
leon ingles.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving160
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox has three
programmes.
Selecting the economy programme
– This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
– Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards
– Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
– Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the program is designed for a sports
mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
You can access this program from the gear stick or from the paddles on the
steering wheel, if this option exists ⇒ page 163.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
–Start the vehicle.
Fig. 120 Program selec-
tion
Fig. 121 Deactivating the
lock
leon ingles.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 161
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position
N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other
gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Driving
– Press and hold the foot brake.
– Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left,
⇒ fig. 122).
– Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
– Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
– Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
– Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
– Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
– Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to
put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
– Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Fig. 122 Driving
leon ingles.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving162
Hill stop
– Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent
rolling back.
– Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine
braking).
Descending gradients
– With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
3rd gear.
WARNING
• The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or
with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
tion P.
• When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it
is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will
creep at a low speed.
• Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk
of an accident).
• The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while
moving (risk of an accident).
• Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic
programme to select a lower gear.
• If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
to avoid rolling back.
• The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even
lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a
reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in
braking distances.
• Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever
in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the
use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed
reduced.
Caution
• Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
• If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 163
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Using the Tiptronic gear system
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select
gears
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
Changing gear with the gear stick
– Put the lever in position D and push to the right to enter the
Tiptronic gate ⇒ fig. 123.
– Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear.
– Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
– Pull right lever (+) towards the steering wheel to change up
⇒ fig. 124.
– Pull left lever (-) towards the steering wheel to change down
⇒ fig. 124.
Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode
regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a
higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer
overrev.
If the “Tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the
“Tiptronic” will then also be in 3rd gear.
Fig. 123 Changing gear
with Tiptronic
Fig. 124 Steering wheel
with levers for automatic
gearbox
leon ingles.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving164
Note
• The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the gear stick
in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ⇒ fig. 125.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the locking knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow ⇒ fig. 125 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully ⇒ .
Always apply the handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
brake applied ⇒ .
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp goes out when the hand-
brake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear in the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,
an audible warning is given.
WARNING
• Never use the handbrake to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion.
The braking distance is considerably longer, as braking is only applied to
the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
• If it is only partially released this will cause overheating of the rear
brakes, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead
to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake
pads/linings.
Caution
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
Fig. 125 Handbrake
between the front seats
leon ingles.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 165
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
–Apply the handbrake.
– The first gear should also be selected.
– Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
⇒ .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did
start to roll.
• If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point
towards the kerb.
• If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away
from the kerb.
• Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
selecting first gear.
WARNING
• Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
unattended.
• Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
• Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
• Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the
vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear
lever / selector lever.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Acoustic parking aid system*
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of
the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear
of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located
on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts at approxi-
mately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
• side of the rear bumper: 0.8 m
• middle of the rear bumper: 1.5 m
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving166
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic
signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reversing
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the
system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase
rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop
signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Trailer towing
For vehicles fitted with a tow bar by the manufacturer, the parking aid system
will not be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a
trailer, as the trailer's electric connecter will be plugged into the vehicle.
Possible faults
If a continuous bleep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is
engaged, this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal
warning of the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated
(by engaging the reverse gear). Thus, the system ready indication will not
sound either. Have the fault repaired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon
as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal then the parking aid
loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles.
To ensure that the system works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and
free of ice and snow.
WARNING
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.
• Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
must take full responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres.
Caution
• Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin posts or trailer draw bars, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not
always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle
in such cases.
• In some cases, obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be
detected immediately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care
around this type of obstacle such as corners, rectangular objects, etc.., these
can cause damage to the vehicle.
• Be especially carefully when manoeuvring into a corner between two
perpendicular walls. Survey the approach of the wall to the side of the vehicle
(using the mirrors)
• The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-
vres.
• Distant ultra-sonic sources (hammers, tyres, construction machinery,
other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.
• Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch them.
When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors
should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more
than 10 cm.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 167
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
• For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in
dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads conditions are poor
(e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-
dent.
• Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will
prevent you using it by mistake.
• It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending gradi-
ents. The vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. Use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
–Push the switch ⇒ fig. 126 to the left to ON.
Switching off system
– Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the speed regulation is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator
on the instrument panel is lit
19)
.
When the speed regulator (CCS) is turned off the indicator is turned off, the
speed regulator is completely deactivated if the 1st gear is engaged.*
19)
Depending on model version
Fig. 126 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving168
Setting speed*
– Press the lower part SET/SET of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 127
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
–Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 128 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate for as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
–Press the lower part SET/– of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
Fig. 127 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
Fig. 128 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving 169
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ page 168, fig. 128 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
• if the brake pedal is depressed,
• if the clutch pedal is depressed,
• if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
• when the lever is moved to the position “CANCEL” without reaching
the “OFF” position. Once the “CANCEL” operation is completed, the lever is
released and returns to its initial position.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ fig. 129 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
A
A
Fig. 129 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
A
Fig. 130 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
leon ingles.book Seite 169 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving170
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one
of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
ignition turned off.
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology 171
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so
could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably
as the brake servo does not function.
• If the brake servo is not functioning, for example if the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than
normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system intervenes here, if you press the brake pedal very
quickly, the brake assist system registers an emergency situation. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
WARNING
• The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery
or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
system.
• The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and
wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
leon ingles.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology172
Anti-lock brake system and traction control
M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake
pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
• The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
• The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 221.
• If the running gear or brakes are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
could be severely limited.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from
spinning when the car is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration
(TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action.
TCS helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console.
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
switched on at all times. Only in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
the wheels is required, should it be disconnected for example
• With compact temporary spare wheel.
• When using the snow chains.
• When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
• When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by “rocking.”
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology 173
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation programme increases the
vehicle's stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation programme helps to reduce the danger of skid-
ding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL and TCS.
Electronic Stabilising Program (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Note
To disconnect using the ESP button ⇒ page 153.
leon ingles.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology174
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
⇒ page 172.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
⇒ page 78.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
• When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow,
press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to
spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking
any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL ⇒ page 199.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
car is accelerating ⇒ page 172.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km,
they must be “run in”. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology 175
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads; road salt
When the velocity is over 80 km/h, and the windscreen wipers are on, the
brake system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs - without warning to the driver - in regular intervals and requires a
more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving
through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter
by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing
the pedal to restore full braking effect.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is
driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion
to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low
mileages without using the brakes very much.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if corrosion has formed on the discs,
it is advisable to clean off the pads and discs by braking firmly a few times
from a moderately high speed ⇒ .
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-
ified workshop and have the fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be
prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-
ping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
• When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs,
select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other
road users. Risk of accident.
• Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the motor is
stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Caution
• Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do
not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
• Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position
if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note
• If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
leon ingles.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology176
• If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recom-
mend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an Approved
Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Maintenance
Programme.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-
ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): The brakes should
be dried by pressing the pedal to restore full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
• New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also
applies when new brake pads are fitted.
• If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
• On steep descents if the brakes are excessively used they will over
heat. Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear
if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes.
• Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking
distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
• Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
• Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the
brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions
before purchasing accessories ⇒ page 199, “Modifications”.
• If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider-
ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
journeys.
Power steering (servotronic*)
The power steering assists the driver when turning the
steering wheel (with the engine running).
The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
If a fault should occur in the servotronic system the power steering* will still
operate. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Intelligent technology 177
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
different speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly,
this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for
instance when parking) – more effort will be required than usual. The fault
should be corrected by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel is very hard to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the car is stationary, this will
place an excessive load on the power steering system, Turning the steering
wheel to its limits places a load on the system, which causes noise. It will also
reduce the idling speed of the engine.
Caution
When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limits for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note
• If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the car can still be steered. However, more
effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
• If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-
fied workshop as soon as possible.
• The power steering requires a special hydraulic fluid. The container is
located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid level in the
reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly. The
hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.
leon ingles.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment178
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
–Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil
consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km. New
brake pads should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km.
During the first 200 km, you can compensate for the reduced braking effect
by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-
gency stop, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with
brake pads which have been run-in.
WARNING
• New tyres do not give maximum grip to start with, and require running-
in. This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500
km.
• New brake pads must be “run in” and do not have the correct friction
properties during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity
may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Exhaust gasses purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Always use unleaded petrol.
– Do not run the fuel tank dry.
leon ingles.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment 179
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil
⇒ page 210, “Topping up engine oil ”.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 255.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest qualified workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 72. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment.
The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
• Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust
system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven.
Caution
Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-
died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving
conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for the
diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light ⇒ page 79.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution
Vehicles equipped with a diesel engine particulate filter must not be refueled
using biodiesel (RME), given that the fuel system may be damaged.
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
• For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
leon ingles.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment180
• In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centres may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with self-directing headlights, the rotation system must previ-
ously be disconnected. To do this please go to a specialist workshop.
Adjusting simple headlights for driving on the left
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side ⇒ fig. 131.
Fig. 131 Right headlight
Fig. 132 Left headlight
leon ingles.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment 181
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
On the left hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-
hand side to the right-hand side ⇒ page 180, fig. 132.
Covering simple headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Fig. 133 Right headlight
Fig. 134 Left headlight
leon ingles.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment182
Adjustments for Bixenon headlights for driving on the left
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side ⇒ fig. 135.
On the left hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-
hand side to the right-hand side ⇒ fig. 136.
Covering Bixenon headlights for driving on the right
Fig. 135 Right headlight
Fig. 136 Left headlight
Fig. 137 Right headlight
Fig. 138 Left headlight
leon ingles.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment 183
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Driving economically and with respect for the
environment
General Observations
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. Fuel consumption may
be reduced from 10 to 15 % by driving defensively and economically. Below
we will give you some suggestions to "alleviate" some of the strain in the
environment and, at the same time, your wallet.
Anticipate the traffic situation well in advance
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you will have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is
possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red
light ahead.
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2,000 rpms.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerate slowly and avoid the “kick-down” position.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling
speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not waste fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved
fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A maladjusted engine may mean an increase of 10 % over normal fuel
consumption.
Check the oil level every time you fill the tank. Oil consumption depends to a
great extent on the engine load and engine speed. It is quite normal that the
oil consumption of a new engine only reaches its lowest level after a certain
mileage. This means that the oil consumption can only be properly assessed
after about 5,000 km. Depending on your personal driving style, oil consump-
tion can be up to 0.5 litres per 1,000 km.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera-
ture.
leon ingles.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment184
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10 %.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
Save electrical energy
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical equipment when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ment that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
heating or the seat heaters*.
Logbook
A good way of keeping a check on fuel consumption is to take regular notes.
You will be able to note the variations (both positive and negative) and react
accordingly.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat
Design measures for economical recycling
• Joints and connections designed for ease of dismantling
• Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
• Increased use of single-grade materials
• Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
• Nearly all materials used can be recycled
• Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
• Recycled materials used in manufacture
• Reduced “vapour emissions” from plastics
• CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioning
Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
mercury, chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
• Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
• Solvent-free cavity sealing
• Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
• Solvent-free adhesives
• No CFCs used in production
leon ingles.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Driving and the environment 185
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Water-soluble paint
leon ingles.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
• Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
• Overall water consumption reduced
• Heat recovery systems
Trailer towing186
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
⇒ page 188.
Connector
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available from any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar
weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the
data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures
for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents⇒ Section
“Technical data”.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker
on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors
fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note
• Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the
vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
leon ingles.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Trailer towing 187
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be found in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing
injury.
Note
• By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when
driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in good time before
going down a steep descent. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Heating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the
coolant ⇒ page 55.
Electronic Stabilisation Program*
Do not switch off the ESP* when towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to
stabilise if the trailer starts to snake.
leon ingles.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Trailer towing188
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 139 Attachment
points for towing bracket
leon ingles.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Trailer towing 189
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully
loaded including the maximum resting weight.
Measurement for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
• Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
• Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
• Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the
vehicle's electrical system. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.
• The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points
which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
• If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
an accident.
• For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution
• If the electrical socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle's electrical system.
Note
For the sports model (FR, Cupra...), fitting of a trailer bracket is not recom-
mended due to the design of the bumpers.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle190
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt
and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
• Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept
closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to
comply could result in poisoning.
• Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package
before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours;
these should be used in well ventilated areas.
• Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-
sion risk.
• Before you wash your vehicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off
the engine, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
Caution
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
paintwork or glass on your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of
water.
For the sake of the environment
• When purchasing car care products, try to select ones which are not
harmful to the environment.
• Left over car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary house-
hold waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 191
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-
matic car wash.
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems
in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large
extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the
wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash operator.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the
brake discs and pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry” the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
– First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.
– Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on
the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last using a different sponge or
glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the surface of the vehicle gently using a chamois leather.
–If it is cold, dry the rubber seals and the surfaces they touch with
a cloth to prevent them freezing. Apply silicone spray to the
rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes care-
fully several times ⇒ page 176, “Braking effect and braking
distance”.
WARNING
• The ignition must always be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
leon ingles.book Seite 191 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle192
• Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is
dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch
the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.
• Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: if the vehicle is rinsed with a
hose, do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, luggage compartment, or bonnet. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunc-
tion.
For the sake of the environment
In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only
in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water
entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere
else may be prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 193.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called “dirt blasters”
⇒ .
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes care-
fully several times ⇒ page 176.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (“rotating
nozzle”). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible
and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Do not use water hotter than 60°C. This could damage the car.
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-
tive materials for example: flexible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 193
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.
The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run
off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants ⇒ page 190. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to
protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-
ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 193, “Waxing the car”.
Caution
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
• Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
• Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent-
free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution
• The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
• Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning the windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based
glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
leon ingles.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle194
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers
which have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on
windows. They will be soiled with wax deposits which would smear the
windows.
If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only. Do not move it to and fro.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner which is available
from your Authorised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could
cause the wiper blades to judder. A window cleanser specifically for removing
wax will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid.
Grease removing cleansers will not remove wax deposits.
Caution
• Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
• The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on
the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
leon ingles.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 195
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
• Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
• Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheels
– Clean steel wheels regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheels should be repaired before the metal starts to rust.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully
several times ⇒ page 176, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is
important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at
regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle. You must “dry” the brakes by applying the brakes carefully
several times ⇒ page 176, “Braking effect and braking distance”.
leon ingles.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle196
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro-
sion and damage.
The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that
the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be
checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried
out by your Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire
hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and
preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we
recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
If this job is carried out, you should ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment
afterwards.
WARNING
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnin
gs ⇒ page 204.
• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always
remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.
• Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
• Do not clean the underside of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting
your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts.
Failure to comply could result in injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-
able filling station.
leon ingles.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 197
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Care of the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
– Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
– Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather care
– The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with
a special leather-care product, which is available from your
Authorised Service Centre.
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
leon ingles.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as
a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected
hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and
dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking
after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be
protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. However, slight
colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.
Caution
• Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
• To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
– Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
– Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
– Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-
matic belt retractor.
WARNING
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can
impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
• Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the
belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.
leon ingles.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 199
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT
Approved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly
and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason
SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if
these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered
by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never
be fitted on the covers of, or within the working range of, the airbags. If
they are, there is a danger of resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an
accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other systems may be affected by the faults.
This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and
also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly.
For this reason, we recommend that all work should be performed by an
Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT
®
approved parts and
accessories.
leon ingles.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications200
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead
to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
• Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag
is triggered.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
leon ingles.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 201
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The fuel cap cover opens automatically with the central
locking system. The tank holds approximately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
– Lift the lid.
– Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
– Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a “click”.
– Close the drawer. Make sure you hear it click into place. The tank
cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment.
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. where further notes on fuel can be found.
Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand
If the central locking system fails, the fuel tank flap can be opened manually
as follows:
• Open the tailgate.
• Remove the cover from the right side trim in the luggage compartment.
• Insert a hand and pull the locking device back.
• Open the cap and take out the plug.
WARNING
• Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
− Never smoke or use any naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
− Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
− For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel
canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident
and leak.
• If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister,
please observe the following points:
Fig. 140 Tank flap open
leon ingles.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels202
− Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the
ground to fill it.
− Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as
possible.
− If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be
in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro-
static charge building up.
− Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution
• Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
• Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Regulation Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol”). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-
mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power. If, in exceptional circumstances, the correct
octane rating is not available:
• For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (95 RON) the
following is valid: Regular unleaded fuel with 91 RON can also be used. This
can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.
• For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON) the
following is valid: Premium unleaded fuel with 95 RON can also be used. This
can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.
– If premium unleaded petrol is not available, the engine can be run on
regular unleaded petrol with 91 RON as an “emergency measure”. In this
case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Avoid using full
throttle. Fill up with premium petrol as soon as possible.
Caution
• Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
However, the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available at commercial establish-
ments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 203
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Even one tankfull of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
• High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason you should use good quality petrol
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel ⇒ page 201.
RME fuel*
Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR
2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to
the standard DIN EN 14214.
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
• Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
• DIN is a German abbreviation for “Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.”,
the German standards institute.
• EN means European Norm.
• FAME is the English abbreviation “Fatty Acid Methyl Ester”.
If the date sticker of the vehicle includes the number PR 2G0 optional equip-
ment) this means that that vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Your Authorised Service Centre or automobile association will be able to
advise on where you can obtain RME biodiesel fuel.
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)
• The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
• Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
• RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. -10°C.
• At outside temperatures below -10°C, we recommend using winter diesel
fuel.
Caution
• RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
adjusted.
leon ingles.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels204
• If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.
• If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel
filter could become clogged.
Note
• In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of
the independent heating.
• The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel
change, also change the fuel filter. Also note the instructions in the Inspec-
tion and Maintenance plan.
• If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we
recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For
this reason, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22°C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24°C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15°C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24°C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution
Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
leon ingles.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 205
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 206.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions ⇒ page 199. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
hazardous area ⇒ .
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk
of accident or fire.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the
engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
• Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
• Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
• Keep children away from the vehicle.
• Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
• Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
is a fire hazard.
• Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the
points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 256. The battery could
explode.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
• Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot.
If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
• Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
• Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths
and tools, in the engine compartment.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
• If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the
engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the
rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the
following points:
− Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
− Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get
trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
− Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is
engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
• If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo-
nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above
warnings:
− Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when
this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels206
− Do not smoke.
− Never work near naked flames.
− Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution
When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 141 Detail of foot-
well area on driver's side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet.
Fig. 142 Arrester hook
for bonnet.
leon ingles.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 207
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
rest position.
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard
⇒ fig. 141 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action ⇒ .
– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
– Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
• Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet,
then carefully open the bonnet.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 204.
Closing the bonnet
– Raise the bonnet slightly.
– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
– At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and
completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
• After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
• If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk
of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the
engine and its long useful life, when topping up or replacement is necessary
use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil
conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at
atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil
leon ingles.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels208
may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example,
long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together
the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
both types of engines.
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Fig. 143 Types of oil
according to temperature
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump
a)
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kW
a)
VW 506 01/ VW 507 00
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)
a)
VW 507 00
leon ingles.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity
20)
.
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached then stop.
– Wait two minutes.
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ fig. 144. Top
up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
- Do not add oil.
20)
Viscosity: oil density
Fig. 144 Engine oil
dipstick.
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels210
Oil level in area
- Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after the zone
Oil level in area
- Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be found, after, in zone
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil
consumption can be up to 0.5 L/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 204.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 204.
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening ⇒ fig. 145.
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 266.
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
Fig. 145 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
A
B
leon ingles.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil specification ⇒ page 207.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 204, “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”.
• Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
• Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
• When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori-
zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
• Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
• Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
A
A
A
A
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels212
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40°C.
WARNING
• The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the
coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the
reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
• The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to
provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that
can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant
could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also
not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
Caution
• Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
• The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 204.
Fig. 146 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
leon ingles.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒ .
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
– If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
–Only use new coolant.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
–Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram ⇒ page 266.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications ⇒ page 212.
Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+, is not avail-
able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up
to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
⇒ page 212.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 204.
• When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do
not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
a burn injury risk.
Caution
• When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
• If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
leon ingles.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels214
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with
fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 204.
Caution
• Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
• Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Fig. 147 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
leon ingles.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing the front windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Changing wiper blades can be done in both the rest and horizontal
positions. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Press on the side tabs and release the blade moving it in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 148.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert the tab into the slot of the blade ⇒ fig. 148.
– Move the blade towards the arm in the opposite direction of the
arrow ,until it clicks into position ⇒ page 215, fig. 148.
– Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
could cause damage.
• Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note
• The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the
bonnet is properly closed.
Fig. 148 Changing the
front wiper blades
A
A
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
leon ingles.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels216
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ⇒ fig. 149.
– Unclip the wiper blade and pull ⇒ fig. 149.
Fitting the wiper blade
– With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
– With the other hand, press the wiper blade into the retainer.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
• Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Fig. 149 Changing the
rear window wiper blade
A
1
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
– Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 266. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
“MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 72.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe
the warnings ⇒ page 204.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Program indicates the brake fluid change
intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 204 in
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with the US standard
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is toxic. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
Fig. 150 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
leon ingles.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels218
• Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and
observe the warnings ⇒ page 204.
• Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
• Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance
Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency
of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution
Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the
risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
• Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
particles containing lead.
• Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
• Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling
cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
tive gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the
battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
leon ingles.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
injury.
• A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
• Keep children away from acid and batteries.
• Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the
engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
• Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
• When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
• Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never
reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
• Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0°C.
• Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
• Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a
damaged battery immediately.
Caution
• Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
• Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
• If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from frost. If it “freezes” it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 204 ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on
page 218.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until
they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram ⇒ page 266.
The round window (“magic eye”) on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery.
If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
of the battery is too low. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic
purposes.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Checking and refilling levels220
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
• We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
• Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 218.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste.
leon ingles.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres 221
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in ⇒ page 178.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
• New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu-
larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
• If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when
driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
bar to the values given on the sticker.
leon ingles.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres222
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced ⇒ .
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure
is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an
increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
• A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
• If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitoring
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument cluster display. The system uses
ESP ⇒ page 173.
Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
increases about 0.1 bar for each 10°C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
heats up while the vehicle is being driven and the tyre pressure will rise
accordingly. For this reason, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should
check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
WARNING
• Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage or
even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
• An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
leon ingles.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres 223
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least
one tyre is insufficient.
- Stop the vehicle.
- Switch the engine off.
- Check the tyre(s).
- Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ fig. 151, running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be
six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre side-
wall (for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of
the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is
1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries
⇒ .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
⇒ page 221.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Fig. 151 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 152 Changing
wheels
leon ingles.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres224
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown ⇒ page 223, fig. 152. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
• The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to
the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
risk of “aquaplaning”.
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
• If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked
by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
• Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Puncture proof tyres
Anti-puncture tyres allow you to continue driving even with a
punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.
Vehicles that are factory-fitted with puncture proof tyres
21)
indicate
on the instrument panel when there is a loss of tyre pressure.
Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)
– Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)
switched on, or switch on ⇒ page 173.
– Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
– Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
“DSST”, “Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
21)
Depending upon version and country.
leon ingles.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres 225
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
At the moment the loss of tyre pressure is indicated on the instrument panel,
at least one of the tyres is driving in emergency mode ⇒ .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
• smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
• there is a smell of rubber,
• the vehicle vibrates,
• there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using anti-puncture
tyres?
• If the Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) is out of operation.
• If the tyre pressure monitoring system is out of operation.
• If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
• It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
starts overheating and gives off smoke.
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
considerably impaired.
• The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and
weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
• Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
• Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
• If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions, the driving
quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
• The anti-puncture tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they
are supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be
detected with a visual inspection.
• Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency
conditions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling ⇒ .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
leon ingles.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres226
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
• A direction of rotation symbol
• “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103 ...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
• Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
• Never use old tyres or those with an unknown “history of use”.
• If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the
brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
• All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
• For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres 227
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model ⇒ page 199.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
• The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
to them.
• Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution
The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 225, “New tyres and wheels” determines the
following speed limits: ⇒ ⇒
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 225, “New tyres and wheels”.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
leon ingles.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Wheels and tyres228
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
sizes ⇒ page 264.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 9
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Note
• In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
legal requirements of the country should be followed.
• We recommend that you ask your Approved Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
leon ingles.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 229
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If and when
Vehicle tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
– Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
• Jack*
• Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
• Box spanner for wheel bolts*
• Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
• Towing eye
• Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten
the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the
required torque, risk of accident.
• The jack* supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels
on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles
or other loads, risk of injury.
• Use the jack* only on firm, level ground.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack, risk of accident.
• If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured
by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
WARNING (continued)
leon ingles.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when230
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow
chains, fit the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
• The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 4.2 bar. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
• Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, risk of acci-
dent.
• Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
accident.
• No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Note
• Vehicles with Brembo brakes must never use emergency wheels. These
vehicles have a sit for repairing tyres.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is
stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System “Tyre repair kit”.
Fig. 153 Luggage
compartment. Access to
the spare wheel
leon ingles.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 231
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
– Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
If you have to change the wheel on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
–Pull off the hub cap. See ⇒ page 232, fig. 154.
–Slacken the wheel bolts.
– Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone.
– Take off the wheel and then put on the spare wheel.
– Lower the vehicle.
leon ingles.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when232
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box
spanner.
–Replace the hub cap.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm.
Note
• If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
• In the interest of safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt
torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
Removing
– Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated
ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
⇒ fig. 154.
–Pull off the hub cap.
Fig. 154 Changing the
wheel: Removing a hub
cap
leon ingles.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 233
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
– Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
–Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to the
left ⇒ fig. 155.
Tighten
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
– An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 155 Changing the
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
leon ingles.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when234
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with
the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
• If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
leon ingles.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 235
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Raising the vehicle
The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel.
– Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
being changed ⇒ fig. 156.
– Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the arm of the jack
is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under
the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the
ground ⇒ fig. 157.
– Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒ fig. 156. A position has been made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use
a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
• Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to
do so could result in an accident.
• The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Fig. 156 The jacking
points
Fig. 157 Fitting the jack
leon ingles.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when236
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
⇒ fig. 158.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the condition of the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts when they are loose. The reversible screwdriver blade should be
removed when the tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 158 Changing the
wheel: hexagonal socket
in screwdriver handle to
turn the wheel bolts after
they have been loosened
Fig. 159 Anti-theft wheel
bolt
leon ingles.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 237
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ page 236, fig. 159.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Error code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the
adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, sealing compound and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound
container.
Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
• Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the
tyre has been damaged by driving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
• Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning
compressor and sealing compound carefully.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
• Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit-
able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully
to the next available qualified workshop.
For the sake of the environment
Used sealing compound containers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
leon ingles.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when238
Note
Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible
with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
“General information and safety notes.”
– Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
– Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a gradient.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
– The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
– Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
– Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
– Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt socket.
– Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
– Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
– Fit the valve cap.
– Unplug the compressor from the socket.
– Return all tools to their proper storing location.
leon ingles.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 239
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
If a fuse has blown it must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Identify the fuse for the failed component ⇒ page 241.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing
the tabs towards the centre of the cover ⇒ fig. 161.
– Identify the fuse for the failed component ⇒ page 241.
Fig. 160 Left side of dash
panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 161 Fuse box cover
in engine compartment
leon ingles.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when240
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
– Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note
• If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
• If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
• Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT dealers.
Colour Amperes
light brown 5
red 10
Blue 15
yellow 20
natural (white) 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
white 80
Blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
Colour Amperes
leon ingles.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 241
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amperes
1 Diagnosis Switchboard/Instrument lights / Headlights switchboard/ Flowmeter/ Heated wipers 10
2
Engine control unit/ ABS-ESP switchboard/ Automatic gearbox/ Instrument panel/ Trailer switchboard/
Light switch / Brake sensor/ Power steering/ Right and left headlights
5
3 Airbag 5
4
Heating/ Reverse switch/ ASR-ESP switch/ Telephone/ Nozzles/ Electrochrome anti-dazzle mirror/ Tom-
tom navigator
5
5 Right xenon headlight 5
6 Left xenon headlight 5
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Vacant
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Central locking 15
13 Diagnosis/ Lights switch/ Rain sensor 10
14 Automatic gearbox / Heating/ ESP switchboard/ Automatic gearbox lever 5
15 Cable control unit 7,5
16 Vacant
17 Alarm 5
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Vacant
leon ingles.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when242
21 Engine management 10
22 Blower control 40
23 Electric windows (front) 30
24 Vacant
25 Rear window heater 25
26 Rear electric windows 30
27 Engine (fuel control unit/pump relay) 15
28 Convenience controls 25
29 Vacant
30 Automatic gearbox 20
31 Vacuum pump 20
32 Vacant
33 Sunroof 30
34 Convenience controls 25
35 Vacant
36 Headlight washer system 20
37 Heated seats 30
38 Engine management 10
39 Vacant
40 Blower control 40
41 Rear wiper motor / Switchboard wiring 15
42 12 V socket/ Cigarette lighter 15
43 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
44 Trailer bracket preinstallation 20
Number Consumer Amperes
leon ingles.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 243
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
45 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
46 Vacant
47 Engine management 10
48 Engine management 10
49 Vacant
Number Consumer Amperes
Number Consumer Amperes
1 Clean 30
2 Steering column 5
3 Cable control unit 5
4ABS 30
5 AQ gearbox 15
6 Instrument panel 5
7 Vacant
8Radio 15
9 Telephone/TomTom Navigator 5
leon ingles.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when244
10
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
11 Vacant
12 Gateway 5
13
Petrol injection module supply 25
Diesel injection module supply 30
14 Coil 20
15
Engine management 5
Fuel pump relay 10
16 ABS pump 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20 Vacant
21 Lambda probe 15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
23
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25 Right lighting 40
26 Left lighting 40
Engine management 40
Engine management 50
Number Consumer Amperes
leon ingles.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 245
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Position in engine compartment: Side box
Fuses
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations.
28 Ignition key 40
29
Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 40
Number Consumer Amperes
B1
Alternator < 140 W 150
Alternator > 140 W 200
C1 Power steering servo 80
D1 Multi-terminal voltage supply “30”. Internal fuse box 100
E1 Ventilator < 500 W / Ventilator > 500 W 50 / 80
F1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air) 80
G1 PTC (Supplementary electrical heating using air) 40
H1 Central locking control unit
Number Consumer Amperes
leon ingles.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when246
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the equipment concerned.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
very least, the bulbs that most affect road safety should have spares in the
vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Turn signals - PY21W
Xenon headlights
22)
/ self-adjusting*
Dipped and full beam - D1S
23)
Flashes and extra full beam - H1
Position W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Fixed rear light
Stop/Position - P21W
24)
Turn signals - P21W
Rear tailgate light unit
Fog light (driver's side) - P21W
Reverse (passenger's side) - P21W
Position - W5W
Side indicator
Side indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Note
• Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should
be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to
change the bulbs except for the fog lights and interior bulbs.
22)
On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
on the automatic control system incorporated.
23)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
24)
Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
leon ingles.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 247
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Main headlight lamps
Turn signals
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Turn signal lamps
– Raise the bonnet.
– Rotate the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 163 to the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 162 Main headlight
lamps
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
Fig. 163 Turn signal
lamps
A
A
leon ingles.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when248
Dipped beam lights
– Raise the bonnet
– Remove the loops ⇒ fig. 164 in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
– Remove the connector ⇒ fig. 165 from the bulb.
– Disengage the retainer spring ⇒ fig. 165 pressing inwards
and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Fig. 164 Dipped head-
lights
Fig. 165 Dipped head-
lights
A
1
A
2
A
3
leon ingles.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 249
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Main beam lights
–Raise the bonnet
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 166 by pulling on this.
– Remove the connector ⇒ fig. 167 from the bulb.
– Press the spring ⇒ fig. 167 inwards and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 166 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 167 Main beam
headlights
A
C
A
1
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when250
Side lights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 168 by pulling on this.
– Extract the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 169 outwards.
– Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replace-
ment.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Rear lights
• On the body
- Indicator, side and brake light
• On the tailgate
- Left hand side: position and antifog.
- Right hand side: reverse and position.
Fig. 168 Side lights
Fig. 169 Side lights
A
D
A
1
leon ingles.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 251
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork
– Press on the side pin outwards and take out the lamp holder.
– Extract the failed bulb and change it for a new one.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when
fitting the lamp holder.
Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
–Open the tailgate.
– Pull the cover off. See the arrow ⇒ fig. 171.
Fig. 170 Indicator, side
and brake lights on the
bodywork
Fig. 171 Lights on the
tailgate
Fig. 172 Removing the
lampholder
leon ingles.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when252
– Take the lampholder out pressing on the securing pins and
extract it outwards ⇒ page 251, fig. 172.
– Replace the faulty lamp, rotating it to the left and outwards.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Side indicators
– Press the indicator on one of its sides to take it out.
– Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs ⇒ fig. 173, arrow .
– Insert the lamp as shown by the arrow ⇒ fig. 173.
Fig. 173 Side indicator
A
1
A
2
leon ingles.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 253
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Luggage compartment lights
– Extract the tulip shaped fitting by pressing on the inside edge of
this -arrow- using the flat side of a screwdriver ⇒ fig. 174.
– Press the lamp sideways and remove it from its housing
⇒ fig. 175.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 174 Luggage
compartment light
Fig. 175 Luggage
compartment light
leon ingles.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when254
Registration light
– To remove the bulb holder, unscrew the bolts ⇒ fig. 176.
– Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 177.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 176 Registration
plate light
Fig. 177 Registration
plate light
leon ingles.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 255
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Sunroof light
– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure ⇒ fig. 179.
– Remove the lamp, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 179.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
• The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles elec-
trical system.
Fig. 178 Removing
sunroof light
Fig. 179 Removing
sunroof light
leon ingles.book Seite 255 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when256
How to jump start: description
In ⇒ fig. 180, the flat battery is and the charged battery .
Jump lead terminal connections
– Switch off the ignition on both vehicles ⇒ .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive ⇒ fig. 180
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery ⇒ .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal
component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the
engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
connect it to a point near the battery ⇒ .
5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or
two minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
Fig. 180 How to connect
the jump leads
A
A
A
B
A
+
A
+
A
-
A
X
leon ingles.book Seite 256 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 257
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 204, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat
battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
• Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger
of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
• Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the
negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could
be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
• Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
• The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
• Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
leon ingles.book Seite 257 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when258
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable ⇒ page 255.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2
nd
or the 3
rd
gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you
would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
leon ingles.book Seite 258 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when 259
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
• Put the selector lever into position “N”.
• Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
• Do not tow further than 50 km.
• If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
• Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
• If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
• If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
• The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
• The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on ⇒ page 258.
Trailer eyes
Fig. 181 The front right
section of the vehicle:
Fitting the front towing
eye
Fig. 182 Fitting the
towing eye to the rear of
the vehicle
leon ingles.book Seite 259 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
If and when260
Fitting the towing eye
– Take the towing ring from the onboard tools.
– Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on
the vehicle.
– Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the
lower slot and lever gently.
– Screw the towing eye as shown by arrow anti-clockwise to the
limit position in the front ⇒ page 259, fig. 181 or rear
⇒ page 259, fig. 182 threaded hole.
leon ingles.book Seite 260 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
General notes on the technical data 261
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.
The vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle
registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted, for different
models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
leon ingles.book Seite 261 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
General notes on the technical data262
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information can be found in the vehicle information: ⇒ fig. 183
This information also figures in the Maintenance Program.
Production control number
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Model code number
Model designation / engine power output
Engine and gearbox code letters
Paint number / interior trim code
Optional equipment codes
Consumption values
CO emissions
2
The data of 2 to 9 also figure in the Maintenance Program.
CO emissions and consumption
2
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) mixed
Fig. 183 Vehicle data
sticker – luggage
compartment
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
A
A
B
A
C
leon ingles.book Seite 262 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
General notes on the technical data 263
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight
category of the car, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note
• Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle
In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The
road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined
The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban
cycle.
CO
2
emissions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is then
analysed to evaluate the CO
2
content and other emissions.
leon ingles.book Seite 263 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
General notes on the technical data264
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒ .
WARNING
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
• Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data ⇒ .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
• For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when
towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are
permitted.
• Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If
the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced . ⇒
leon ingles.book Seite 264 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
General notes on the technical data 265
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure
is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an
increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
leon ingles.book Seite 265 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data266
Technical data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do
so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Radiator expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the
components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
⇒ page 204.
Overview
Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are
contained as of ⇒ page 261.
Fig. 184 Diagram for the
location of the various
elements
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
leon ingles.book Seite 266 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 267
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (86 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (86)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Compression ratio 10,5 ± 0,3
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1746
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1251
Gross axle weight, front in kg 890
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 620
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
leon ingles.book Seite 267 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data268
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1750-4000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Compression ratio 9,7 -0,4
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1819
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1324
Gross axle weight, front in kg 969
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 899
Permitted roof load in kg 75
leon ingles.book Seite 268 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 269
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1595
Compression ratio 10,5 ± 0,5
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,7
leon ingles.book Seite 269 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data270
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1783
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1280
Gross axle weight, front in kg 936
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 640
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 118 (160)/ 5000-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4200
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1798
Compression ratio 9,8 -0,5
Fuel
Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
leon ingles.book Seite 270 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 271
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 213
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,0
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1395
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1035
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 898
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
leon ingles.book Seite 271 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data272
Petrol engine 2.0l 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression ratio 11,5-0,5
Fuel
Super Plus 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1830
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1335
Gross axle weight, front in kg 989
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 883
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 660
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
leon ingles.book Seite 272 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 273
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression ratio 11,5-0,5
Fuel
Super Plus 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 208
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1870
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1375
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1024
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 888
Permitted roof load in kg 75
leon ingles.book Seite 273 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data274
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression ratio 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,3
leon ingles.book Seite 274 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 275
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1904
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1409
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1046
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 897
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression ratio 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
leon ingles.book Seite 275 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data276
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,2
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1939
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1444
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1076
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 902
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 720
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
leon ingles.book Seite 276 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 277
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 177 kW (240 bhp). Cupra
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 177 (240)/ 5700-6300
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 300/ 2200-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression ratio 10,3 ± 0,5
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 247
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 4,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 6,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1047
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 926
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 720
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
leon ingles.book Seite 277 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data278
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 66 (90) /4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/1800-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression ratio 18 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 174
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1860
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1365
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1015
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
leon ingles.book Seite 278 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 279
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4,3
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression ratio 19 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,3
leon ingles.book Seite 279 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data280
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1860
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1365
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1015
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4,3
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression ratio 19 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
leon ingles.book Seite 280 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 281
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1395
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1044
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4,3
leon ingles.book Seite 281 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data282
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1042
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 885
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
leon ingles.book Seite 282 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 283
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1925
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1430
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1077
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
leon ingles.book Seite 283 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data284
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
leon ingles.book Seite 284 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 285
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1390
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1042
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 885
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
leon ingles.book Seite 285 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data286
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1925
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1430
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1077
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
leon ingles.book Seite 286 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 287
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 214
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,2
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1901
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1406
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1048
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 894
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
leon ingles.book Seite 287 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data288
Engine oil capacity
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
leon ingles.book Seite 288 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Technical data 289
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Capacities
Tyre pressure
Length, width 4,315 mm/ 1,768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,459 mm
Front and rear projection 949 mm/ 788 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track width
a)
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1,525 mm 1,509 mm
1,533 mm 1,517 mm
Fuel tank 55 litres, reserve 7 litres
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 L/ 5.5 L
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
leon ingles.book Seite 289 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
leon ingles.book Seite 290 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index 291
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adjusting simple headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjustments for Bixenon headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbags
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Apple iPod connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 125
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 125
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 159
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
123
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 137
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Belt tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Brake pad wear indicator*
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 178
leon ingles.book Seite 291 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index292
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 176
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bulb changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 154
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CD loader* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 95
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Centre console with drinks holder . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing the rear light lamps
Position light, fog light and rear light on the
tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Changing the rear lights
Indicator, side and brake lights on the
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 219
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats
ISOFIX and Toptether systems . . . . . . . . . . . 52
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 190
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cleaning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cleaning steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cleaning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control
Light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
leon ingles.book Seite 292 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index 293
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Coolant level
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 169
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Diesel engine particulate filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44
Display (without warning or information texts) . 59
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 172
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Economically / With Respect for the
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Driving with respect for the environment . . . . . 183
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 115
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 155
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emission control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 204
leon ingles.book Seite 293 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index294
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 78
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 173
Example of menu use
Open the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 67
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 178
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Front interior light
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
G
G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
General overview of the engine compartment 266
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 164
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 129
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Headlight washer system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
leon ingles.book Seite 294 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index 295
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Heated window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Indicator lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Indicator lights
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument panel menus
Principal menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ISOFIX and Toptether systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
K
Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
L
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Load compartment
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 139
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 200
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
leon ingles.book Seite 295 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index296
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 55
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Puncture proof tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
R
Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Running in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety notes
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
leon ingles.book Seite 296 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index 297
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Self directional headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 265
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter *
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 156
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 157
Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Steering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering wheel controls
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 152
Stowage area
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Stowage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Stowage compartments
Front left hand side seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sunroof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
T
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tank
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 265
To fold down the seat back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
leon ingles.book Seite 297 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
Index298
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Trailer turn signals
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 118
Turning on the emergency indicators . . . . . . . 116
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 230
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 237
Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 237
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 221
U
Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
USB* connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . 163
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle paint
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Volumetric sensor*
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Warning reports
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Warning texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 192
Water
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 214
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 265
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 264
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21
Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 204
leon ingles.book Seite 298 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 1:47 13
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.07
Interior Manual LEON 30/8/07 09:36 Página 3
Inglés 1P0012003BA (07.07) (GT9)
auto emoción
Leon Inglés (07.07)
auto emoción
LEON
owner’s manual
1P0012003BA
Portada Manual LEON 30/8/07 09:33 Página 3
